Skip to main content

Full text of "The life of Laurence, Bishop of Hólar in Iceland (Laurentius saga) Translated from the Icelandic by Oliver Elton"

See other formats


/ 


at 


£-1 


LIFE  OF  LAURENCE,  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR 


THE  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  BISHOP 
OF  H6LAR  IN  ICELAND  {LAURENT- 
I  US  SAGA)  BY  EINAR  HAFLIDASON 
TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  ICELANDIC 
BY  OLIVER  ELTON 


LONDON 
RIVINGTONS 

1890 


ft 

7%fZ> 


9642»7 


PREFACE 

[n  the  year  1106,  the  long  arm  of  the  Catholic 
Church  reached  the  little  town  of  H61ar,  in  North 
Iceland,  and  there,  almost  on  the  habitable 
extreme  of  earth,  planted  her  most  northern 
bishopric.  Marvellous  mother,  never  satisfied  till 
she  had  set  her  puissant  children  on  the  frozen  if 
not  on  the  '  flaming  frontier  '  of  the  world  !  The 
first  bishop  of  the  new  See — which  was  formed 1 
to  relieve  the  distant  and  hard-worked  bishop  of 
Skalholt,  and  to  minister  to  the  populous  Northern 
Quarter — was  John  Ogmundarson,  the  subject  of 
the  beautiful  biography  that  bears  his  name,  and 
often  spoken  of  in  the  following  pages  with  every 
term  of  sainthood.  A  long  line  of  prelates 
followed;  and  in  1267,  three  years  after  the  com- 
plete submission  of  the  country  to  Norway,  was 
1  See  Jdris  Saga,  ch.  19  ;  and  Note  3  below. 


vi  PREFACE. 

born  one  of  their  most  striking  figures,  Laurentius 
or  Laurence  Kalfsson,  in  familiar  Norse  '  Lafranz. 
His  Life,  written  by  his  careful  if  somewhat  near- 
sighted disciple  Einar  Haflidason,  is  here  trans- 
lated. A  true  pastor — dogged,  imperious,  bene- 
ficent towards  men,  towards  his  God  humbly  and 
radiantly  pious — Laurence  is  not  only  a  dominant 
figure  in  the  church  troubles  of  his  time,  but  in 
his  inner  life  shines  to  us  almost  with  the  light  of 
the  saints.  The  pioneers  of  religion  in  Norse 
lands,  surrounded  by  bloody  and  intricate  ven- 
dettas, involved  in  fierce  litigation  with  laymen 
and  with  each  other,  needed  all  their  heritage  of 
the  Viking  demon;  they  were  the  axes  of  God, 
and  had  to  be  sharp.  All  the  more  singular  is  the 
literary  product  they  inspired — the  ecclesiastical 
biography  or  Saga.  Like  the  Passion  Hymns  of 
a  later  day,  these  histories  of  the  Icelandic  bishops 
reveal  a  religious  language  which  is  beautiful, 
tender,  unrhetorical,  free  from  false  unction  j  and, 
flowing  in  a  soft  abundant  current,  shows  the  wish 
of  the  writer,  not  to  be  admired,  but  to  relieve 
his  heart  and  to  penetrate  our  own. 

These  are  only  some  of  the  qualities  of  a  class  of 


PREFACE.  vii 

composition  in  which  the  Icelander  was  a  master. 
Others — such  as  the  clear  thrusting  dialogue,  the 
power  of  etching  memorable  scenes  in  a  few 
thrifty  strokes,  and  the  born  sense  for  expanding 
and  proportioning  a  story, — the  church  biography 
shares  with  the  great  heroic  Sagas.  Everywhere, 
naturally,  we  find  all  the  defects  of  the  mytho- 
logical spirit.  The  sense  of  evidence,  where  a 
marvel  is  in  question,  is  unborn.  Here,  as  else- 
where, the  most  sincere  and  punctilious  mind — 
like  that  of  Einar  for  instance — is  a  worthless 
witness  when  an  omen,  a  dream,  or  a  judgment 
upon  a  sinner  tempt  it.  Perhaps  the  mission  of 
the  Church  could  only  have  breathed  in  this 
atmosphere  of  naive  acceptance;  at  any  rate, 
though  the  Gospel's  true  power  lay  in  winning 
hearts,  the  marvels  of  the  saints  served  to  fill  some 
of  the  void  left  by  the  departed  Asgard.  Men's 
picturing  and  worshipping  instinct  had  to  be  fed 
somehow,  and  it  was  centuries  before  the  poetry 
of  normal  life  could  satisfy  the  hunger  \  the  result 
being,  that  chronicles  like  Einar's  must  be  read  in 
the  spirit  in  which  we  read,  not  Thucydides,  but 
Herodotus. 


viii  PREFACE. 

This  short  translation  had  the  honour  of  en- 
couragement from  the  veteran  Norse  scholar  so 
lately  lost,  Gudbrand  Vigfusson.  His  own  heavy 
work  did  not  prevent  him  from  generously  offering 
to  revise  these  sheets.  But  though  his  death 
interrupted  everything,  his  edition  of  the  text 
(published  in  Copenhagen  in  1858),  and  his 
Dictionary,  practically  did  half  the  labour  of  a 
version ;  without  these  aids,  indeed,  no  version 
pretending  to  accuracy  could  well  exist.  In  any 
piece  of  work  which  he  did,  every  one  can  feel 
the  hand  of  the  master-scholar;  like  Casaubon, 
he  cut  roads  into  the  jungle  of  learning,  and  his 
roads  are  Roman. 

The  translation,  in  spite  of  this  loss,  has  had  the 
great  advantage  of  aid  from  Vigfusson's  partner  in 
Scandinavian  research,  Mr.  York  Powell,  who  has 
spared  no  pains  to  improve  a  work  which  he 
originally  suggested. 


ERRATA. 

Page  4,  at  bottom  of  page,  read  'Then  was  revealed 
Mary  Magdalen,  and  set  in  a  shrine  at  St.  Maximin.' 

Page  35,  margin,  for  'Dec.  23'  read  'July  20.' 

Page  67,  for  'seven  hundred  and  twenty  rend  'seven 
thousand  two  hundred.' 

Page  73,  I.  5,  for  '  Shak  '  read  'Skak.'  Last  line,  for 
'  to  Norway  '  read  '  to  Iceland.' 

Page  90,  last  words  of  Chap.  43,  read  '  He  chanted  Mass 
foe  the  first  time  on  All  Saints'  Day.' 

Page  95,  1.  12,  for  '  requiems '  read  '  hours  of  the  dead. ' 

Page  105,  1.  14,  for  '  Flugumyri  lent  money,'  read  '  leased 
Plugumyri/ 

Page  106,  1.  7,  for  '  in '  read  '  on  to.5 


UL 


THE  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE,  BISHOP 
OF  HOLAR. 

WHEN  at  the  helm  of  God's  Church  Uni- 
versal was  the  Apostolic  Father  Urban, 
fourth  of  his  name,  and  Pope  in  Rome ; 
and  when  Lord  Hakon,  archbishop  of  Nidaros 
church,  and  Jorund  Thorsteinsson,  bishop  of  the 
church  of  Holar,  were  mighty  in  the  northern 
quarter  of  Iceland ;  and  when  that  gracious  lord, 
our  lord  the  King  Magnus  Hakonarson,  ruled  in 
Norway  with  the  temporal  rod ; — this  history, 
which  with  God's  help  we  will  begin,  was  first 
written,  to  delight  and  fleet  the  time  of  good 
men,  and  for  knowledge  withal  and  for  edifying ; 
concerning  Lord  Laurence,  bishop  at  Holar,  of 
excellent  memory.  He  himself  admonished  me 1 
to  keep  in  mind  whatsoever  he  related  about 
the  course  of  his  life  before  he  was  bishop  at 
Holar.  But  his  life  afterwards  was  well  known  to 
one,  who  was  night  and  day  in  his  service  and 
lodging  while  he  was  bishop  in  Iceland  until  he 
died.  Here  also  much  is  gathered  together,  after 
the  notices  of  the  annals  that  seem  best  informed, 
about  divers  events  that  befell  in  divers  countries. 


4  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  3. 

grfma,  being  his  nephew's  wife,  to  his  home  at 
Vellir.  A  heaviness  came  upon  her  so  that  she 
could  scarce  bear  up,  and  before  St.  Laurence' 
Day  she  fell  ill,  lay  on  the  floor,  and  could  not  be 
delivered;  many  prayers  were  said  over  her,  but 
there  was  no  change  in  her  for  the  better.  Before 
mass  on  St.  Laurence'  Day  Sir  Thorarin  went  in 
to  her,  and  chanted  over  her,  and  by  God's  grace 
she  bore  a  man-child ;  but  in  this  child  no  man 
saw  a  sign  of  life.  Then  Sir  Thorarin  vowed  that 
this  boy  should  be  called  Laurence,  and  that  if 
St.  Laurence  vouchsafed  life  to  this  boy,  he 
should  all  his  life  after  keep  a  water-fast 4  before 
St.  Laurence'  Day,  if  he  had  years  and  health  for 
it.  And  when  this  vow  had  been  confirmed  and 
pronounced  by  Sir  Thdrarin,  a  sign  of  life  was 
straight  seen  in  the  boy.  Then  was  the  child 
baptized  'Laurence.'  When  he  grew  a  mighty 
man,  he  kept  that  vow :  and  after  he  became 
bishop  at  Hdlar,  he  kept  St.  Laurence'  Day  with 
high  festival,  doing  the  prelude  in  the  mass  him- 
self, keeping  it  a  day  of  banquet,  and  giving  much 
alms  on  the  same. 

1267  In  the  birth-year  of  Laurence  these  things  befell 
abroad.5  Hakon,  archbishop  in  Nidarris,  and  Prince 
Olaf  died.  Charles,  king  in  Apulia,  went  on  a  crusade 
to  Jerusalem ;  also  Lewis  his  brother,  king  of  the 
Franks.  Then  appeared  Mary  Magdalen  and  was  set 
in  the  shrine  of  St.  Maximin.  In  the  second  year  of 
Laurence'  life  John  was  consecrated  archbishop  at 
Nidartfs.  Conrad  was  beaten  by  King  Charles  out  by 
Rimini,  and  fled  to  Benevento,  and  was  there  beheaded. 
Then  died  Earl  Gizurd,  and  Sigvard  bishop  in  Skalholt, 

1269    and  Gauti  bishop  of  the  Faroe  Isles.     In  the  third  year 


ch.  3.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  5 

of  Laurence'  life  the  Icelanders  consented  to  pay  tribute 
to  King  Magnus.  Ami  was  consecrated  bishop  to 
Skalholt,  and  Erlend  to  the  Faroes.  In  the  fourth  year 
of  Laurence"  life  the  Icelanders  received  laws  of  King 
Magnus.  King  Lewis  put  a  tribute  on  King  Charles. 
The  following  kings  died  of  poison  which  was  cast 
into  wells — the  Sultan  of  Tunis,  Theobald  of  Navarre. 
James  went  to  Jerusalem.    Queen  Margaret,  and  Peter, 

1271  bishop  of  Bergen,  died.  In  the  fifth  year  of  Laurence' 
life,  Philip  was  crowned  king  of  the  Franks ;  and 
Norwegian  laws  came  into  Iceland.  In  the  sixth-  year 
of  Laurence'  life  there  was  no  Pope  for  four  years 
running.  Clement  was  the  next  Pope  after  Urban. 
In  the  seventh  year  of  Laurence'  life  Gregory,  sixth 
of  his  name,  was  made  Pope.  King  Magnus  and 
Valdimar,  king  of  the  Swedes,  had  a  conference. 
Bishop  Jbrund  went  to  Norway,  and  Bishop  Ami, 
Rafn,  and  Thorvard  came  to  Iceland.  There  were  now 
disputes  in  the  contest6  over  the  glebes.  Henry, 
king  of  the  English,  died.  In  the  eighth  year  of 
Laurence'  life  Pope  Gregory  had  a  council  at  Lyons 
and  reformed  the  faith  of  the  Greeks.  Then  died 
James,  archbishop  of  Lund  in  Denmark.  Edward, 
king  of  the  English,  was  crowned.  Archbishop  John 
visited  the  country  ;  and  a  piece  came  of  the  Crown  of 
Thorns  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  which  was  sent  to 
King  Magnus  from  Philip,  king  of  France.  In  the 
ninth  year  of  Laurence'  life,  Eirek,  son  of  Duke  Birgi, 
came  from  Denmark  with  a  troop  and  strove  with 
Valdimar  his  brother,  aided  by  Duke  Magnus  their 
brother,  and  King  Valdimar  fled  into  Norway.  Then 
came  such  mighty  hail  from  heaven  on  St.  Laurence' 
Eve,  in  certain  spots  in  the  lordship  of  the  Thronds, 
that    the    largest    hailstones  weighed    fifteen    ounces. 

1276  In  the  tenth  year  of  Laurence'  life  died  Pope  Gregory, 
and  Pope  Innocent,  and  Pope  Adrian,  who  was  not  a 
priest,  but  the  chief  of  the  cardinals,  and  called  Octo- 
bonus.  John  the  Twenty-first  was  Pope.  In  Tiinsberg 
King  Magnus  gave  the  title  of  Earl  to  Magnus,  son  of 
Magnus,  Earl  of  the  Orkneys. 

Now    while  we  have   been  speaking  of  those 
matters  to  begin  with,  Laurence   stayed  in  turn 


6  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  3-4. 

with  the  priest  Thorarin  his  kinsman  at  Vellir,  or 
else  with  his  father  and  mother,  where  they  were 
keeping  house ;  and  now  he  was  taught.  It  was 
soon  manifest  that  he  was  eager  to  learn  good. 

4.  Once  at  Vellir  this  befell.  The  schoolboys 
were  brawling  in  the  church  there  at  Vellir ;  and 
it  so  happened  that  something  Laurence  threw  hit 
the  image  of  Our  Lady  and  broke  off  a  leaf  of  the 
sceptre  she  was  holding.  And  when  Sir  Thorarin 
came  to  church  at  even,  the  lads  told  him  of 
Laurence'  misdoing;  and  he  was  very  wroth 
thereat,  and  vowed  him  a  sound  hiding  on  the 
morrow.  When  Laurence  knew  that  this  must 
be  fulfilled  even  as  it  was  promised  him,  he 
betook  him  for  help  where  there  was  good  store 
of  it ;  he  flung  down  weeping  on  the  floor  before 
Our  Lady's  image,  prayed  for  aid  from  her  and 
forgiveness ;  and  especially  that  the  heart  of  his 
kinsman  might  be  softened  towards  him.  Next 
morning  Priest  Thorarin  called  his  kinsman 
Laurence,  and  asked  him  whether  he  had  put  up 
any  prayer  to  escape  his  thrashing.  He  said  he 
had  made  one  to  Mary  Queen. 

1 1  doubt  as  much,'  said  Sir  Thdrarin,  '  for  in 
the  night  it  was  revealed  to  me  that  it  was  Our 
Lady's  will  that  I  should  not  beat  thee  for  this, 
but  should  have  thy  breakage  mended.'  This  was 
a  sign  that  his  appeals  and  prayers,  which  were 
acceptable  in  his  childish  years  to  God  and  his  sweet 
Mother,  would  be  much  more  so  afterwards. 

When  Sir  Thorarin  was  dead  and  gone,  Kalf 
took  it  so  to  heart  that  he  could  scarce  bear  up, 


ch.  4.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  7 

and  soon  he  departed.  Money  after  that  was 
scant  and  hard  to  find;  and  yet  Thorgrima  and 
her  husband  had  lived  long  on  the  lands  of  the 
church  at  Holar.  Lord  Bishop  Jorund  asked  the 
lad  Laurence  to  his  house  at  Holar,  and  put  him 
to  book-learning,  saying  he  thought  that  this  lad 
Laurence  would  gain  much  understanding  in  the 
lore  and  learning  of  books.  Year  after  year  went 
by,  so  that  Laurence  waxed  in  book  lore  and 
knowledge,  and  was  best  of  all  the  scholars  of  his 
years.  Sir  Oblaud  Hallvardsson  was  schoolmaster 
there,  and  he  took  such  a  liking  to  this  youth 
Laurence  that  he  always  made  him  stay  in  the 
school  and  question  the  other  scholars,  when  he 
was  himself  feasting  and  drinking  with  Bishop 
Jorund.  (The  aforesaid  Sir  Oblaud  was  near  of 
kin  to  the  Lord  Bishop,  and  had  before  then  been 
abroad  and  much  loved  by  the  archbishop  in 
Nidaros;  and  Lord  Bishop  Jorund  bore  much 
love  to  Sir  Oblaud  his  kinsman.)  Often,  when 
the  other  scholars  were  at  play  or  other  light- 
mindedness,  there  stayed  Laurence  bettering  his 
mind,  studying  books,  or  teaching  others.  There 
was  much  play  of  malice  among  the  other  scholars 
at  this  :  there,  they  said,  went  a  bishop-elect ;  and 
much  fleering  and  flouting  they  had  at  him ;  but 
he  only  went  on  the  further  at  bettering  his  mind. 
His  orders  proceeded  regularly  and  duly,  and  the 
more  swiftly,  because  he  was  a  better  scholar  than 
others.  And  as  soon  as  he  was  hallowed  under 
Holy  Orders,  he  was  appointed  at  home  at  Holar 
and  there  was  deacon.     As  soon  as  Laurence  was 


8  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  4-5. 

twenty-two  he  was  ordained  priest  by  Lord  Bishop 
Jorund,  and  then  he  kept  school.  He  got  so 
toward  in  scholarly  composing  of  Latin  prose  and 
verse  that  he  could  make  verse  as  fast  as  a  man 
could  talk  Latin. 

5.  Turn  we  back  again  to  the  events  that  befell  here 
1277  in  the  country  and  elsewhere.  In  the  eleventh  year  of 
Laurence  died  Pope  John.  King  Magnus  gave  the  title 
of  Baron  to  his  liegemen.  Hrafn  was  knighted.  King 
Magnus  and  Archbishop  John  made  a  lasting  settlement 
between  Church  and  Crown,  and  confirmed  it  with  their 
hand  and  seal.  In  the  twelfth  year  of  Laurence,  King 
Magnus  demanded  a  levy  to  go  to  the  Elfi.  Bishops 
Arni  and  Jorund  were  reconciled.  The  bones  of  Odd, 
son  of  Thorarin,  were  carried  to  the  church  in  Skalholt. 
In  the  next  year  after,  Bishops  Ami  and  Jorund  went 
abroad.  Hrafn  came  home,  and  Lodin  of  Bakki  with 
lawman's  powers.  Abbot  Vermund  of  Thingeyri  died. 
In  the  next  year,  Pope  Nicholas  died,  and  also  King 
Magnus  Hakonarson.,  King  Eirek  was  crowned. 
Bishops  Jorund  and  Arni,  Lodin  the  '  Rag,'  and  John 
the  lawman  with  a  new  code,  came  home.  Bjarni  was 
consecrated  abbot  to  Thingeyri.  Next  year  Martin 
was  consecrated  Pope.  Lodinn  the  '  Rag's'  journey  to 
Norway  took  place.  Eirek,  king  of  Norway,  took 
Queen  Margaret,  daughter  of  Alexander,  king  of  Scot- 
land, to  wife.  Moreover  in  the  next  year  the  houses  in 
Nidards  were  burnt.  Lord  Archbishop  John  died  out 
east  in  Skarir,  having  been  exiled  from  Norway  in  the 
1283  same  year.  In  the  next  year  after  Lord  Hrafn  and 
Lord  Lawman  Erlend  came  to  Iceland  and  raised  claim 
to  the  demesnes6  in  Iceland.  Then  a  great  plague  over- 
ran Iceland.  Also  next  year  quarrelling  arose  between 
Hrafn  on  one  side,  and  Bishop  Arni  and  those  who 
were  appointed  to  livings,  on  the  other.  Stock  perished, 
and  many  men  died  of  famine  in  Iceland,  and  there  was 
desolation  of  many  homesteads.  Also  next  year,  the 
title  of  Earl  was  given  to  Lord  Alf  and  to  Audun  '  Oats'. 

Also  next  year  King  Eirek  sent  Sir  Gudmund 
Kallsson  to  Iceland  to  demand  men  for  a  levy. 


ch.  5-6.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  9 

This  same  Gudmund  came  to  Iceland  with  the 
vestments  which  King  Eirek  had  given  to  St.  John, 
bishop  of  Holar.  It  came  to  pass  that  King 
Eirek  was  on  his  way  to  a  council  of  kings  and 
could  not  get  a  wind.  Prayers  were  made  to 
many  saints,  but  it  was  granted  none  the  more. 
Then  came  Sir  Gudmund  to  the  king,  saying  : — 

'Pray,  Sire,  to  John,  bishop  of  Holar;  he  is 
very  swift  to  hearken  to  prayers ;  and  offer  him 
your  best  robes  of  rich  stuff.' 

1  Thus  shall  it  be  done,  Sir  Priest,'  said  the  king, 
1  and  let  him  show  he  is  no  sluggard,  as  Icelanders 
commonly  are.' 

Then  the  calm  ended.  Straightway  Sir  Gud- 
mund bade  them  hoist  sail,  and  forthwith  a  fair 
and  good  wind  came  blowing :  and  the  king  in 
four  days  reached  the  harbour  he  had  chosen, 
and  he  honoured  St.  John,  bishop  of  Holar,  ever 
after.  And  dalmatics  were  made  of  the  clothes  at 
Holar.  Also  in  the  next  year  came  Jorund,  arch- 
bishop-elect to  Nidards.  Hallkell  '  Crow-dance ' 
was  put  to  death.  Alf  was  exiled  and  outlawed ; 
and  also  Queen  Ingibjorg  died. 

6.  Next  year  Bishop  Jorund  and  Lord  Thor- 
vard  came  to  Iceland.    Laurence,  as  we  said  before, 
was  now  ordained  priest;  and  he  was 
now  twenty-two.     Here  he  was  priest  for      1288 
three  years  and  also  schoolmaster.    When 
Laurence   was   twenty-five,  Bishop   Jorund  gave 
him  a  benefice  up  north  at  Hals  in  Fnjoska-dale. 
He  was  a  year  there,  and  then  gave  up  the  living 
because  he   had   ill  luck  with  his   stock  in   his 


io  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  6. 

housekeeping :  he  was  then  shifted  back  to  Holar. 
In  the  second  year  of  Sir  Laurence'  priesthood, 
it  came  to  pass  that  King  Eirek  sent  Hrdlf  to 
Iceland  on  a  search  for  the  New  World.  Bishop 
Jorund  of  Holar  went  over  the  diocese  of  Bishop 
Ami  to  reclaim  glebes  for  the  Church,  by  the 

counsel  of  Archbishop  Jorund.  In  the 
1290     year  following  Bishop  Jorund  went   a- 

broad  and  stayed  two  years  in  Norway ; 
during  this  time  Sir  Halldor  Grfmsson  was 
official  over  Holar  See,  and  Sir  Haflidi  Steinsson 
was  steward  at  Holar.  Sir  Haflidi  was  the  best  of 
overseers  for  all  secular  counsel ;  he  had  before 
this  been  to  Norway,  and  was  chaplain  for  some 
years  of  King  Eirek  and  the  queen.  Laurence 
and  Sir  Haflidi  became  most  friendly  and  com- 
panionable together;  often  afterwards  Laurence 
testified  that  he  had  been  a  most  trusty  friend  to 
him.  In  the  third  year  of  Laurence'  priesthood, 
Hrdlf  wanted  men  in  Iceland  for  a  voyage  to  the 
New  World.  Then  arose  dispute  between  Arch- 
bishop Jorund  and  the  canons  in  Nidar6s.     In 

the  following  year  was  the  voyage  home 
1292      of  Lord  Bishop  Jorund,  and  Bishop  Ami, 

of  Lord  Thdrd  of  Christopher,  and  many 
others  with  writs  from  the  king.  Then  began  a 
fresh  contest  over  the  glebes.6  Sigurd  was  told 
to  quit  Hlid,  at  Modruvellir,  in  the  Horg  Valley, 
and  he  thought  himself  entitled,  by  inheritance,  to 
keep  his  land.  This  displeased  Bishop  Jorund, 
who  gave  him  many  admonitions;  and  yet  he 
budged  from  his  estate  not  a  whit  the  more.    And 


ch.  6.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  ii 

it  came  to  this,  that  he  was  ready  to  excommuni- 
cate him.  Then  he  bade  Sir  Laurence  go  north 
to  Modruvellir  with  a  letter  of  excommunication 
which  he  was  to  announce  before  Sigurd,  if  he 
refused  to  quit.  Laurence  took  this  journey  so 
sadly  that  he  went  with  one  man  north  over  the 
Pass  of  Hedinn,  got  to  Modruvellir,  and  talked  to 
yeoman  Sigurd  declaring  to  him  that  if  he  would 
not  obey  and  come  to  terms,  heavy  affliction  would 
befall  him.  Sigurd  took  Laurence'  words  heavily, 
saying  that  it  was  nought  to  him  what  he  said. 
Then,  next  day,  when  high  festival  came  on,  Sir 
Laurence  read  the  Bishop's  writ  at  mass  after 
Gospel,  so  loud  and  clear  that  Sigurd  heard,  and 
all  who  were  in  the  church.  And  this  was  the 
tenor  of  the  writ :  Bishop  Jorund  laid  the  ban 
on  Sigurd  and  barred  him  from  communication 
with  Christian  men.  From  Sigurd  and  his  men 
Laurence  got  many  revilings  and  threatenings,  and 
such  array  was  made  against  him  that  it  was 
hardly  safe  for  him  to  leave  the  church. 

Then  straightway  yeoman  Sigurd  departed  and 
went  west  to  Holar  with  much  company.  At  first 
Sigurd  said  bitterly  that  it  misbeseemed  the  bishop 
to  bear  so  hard  on  the  king's  lieges.  And  he 
asked,  Did  the  bishop  own  that  he  had  bidden 
Laurence  proceed  thus?  But  the  bishop  said 
that  Laurence  had  not  acted  in  the  way  he  had 
bidden  him.  The  end  was  that  Sigurd  and  the 
bishop  made  a  bargain  :  the  bishop  paying  a  sum 
to  Sigurd,  while  church  and  bishop  were  to  have 
freehold  of  the  living  for  ever.7    Then  Sir  Laurence 


12  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  6-7. 

came  back,  Sigurd  having  ridden  off  from  Hdlar. 
And  from  this  journey  Laurence  earned  but  labour 
and  trouble;  from  Sigurd  despitefulness  and 
hate,  and  small  cheer  from  the  bishop.  This  was 
the  root  of  the  estrangement  between  Bishop 
Jorund  and  Laurence ;  for  Laurence  thought  that 
he  had  received  a  great  rebuff  for  the  mission 
which  he  deemed  he  had  done  faithfully.  And 
he  desired  much  to  leave  Iceland,  because  he 
thought  he  would  get  little  cordiality  from  Bishop 
Jorund :  also  many  of  the  bishop's  kin  were  very 
short  with  him. 

7.  Next   summer,  after   '  Flitting-days,' 8   Lord 

Peter  came  to  Iceland  from  Eidi-at-Knerri.     All 

the  northern  quarter  was  appointed  to 

1293  him  by  the  king  for  his  province.    Lord 
Bishop   Jorund  invited   him   to  Holar, 

and  there  he  stayed  the  winter.  Sir  Laurence  and 
Lord  Peter  came  to  feel  fast  friends.  Laurence 
took  counsel  with  himself  and  travelled  with  him 
in  the  summer,  and  talked  and  questioned  with 
him  of  many  matters  entertainingly.  Once 
Laurence  asked  Lord  Peter  how  men  looked  or 
bore  themselves  when  the  sea  was  bad.  '  Vari- 
ously,' said  Peter,  '  I  tell  thee  no  more  about  it 
this   time.'      In   the  summer  after,   Sir 

1294  Laurence  rode  south  into  Skalholt.     It 
is  notable  that  Lord  Bishop  Ami  Thor- 

laksson,  who  was  in  authority  there,  welcomed 
Laurence  so  signally  that  he  made  him  sit  next 
to  him.  Many  marvelled  that  he  gave  to  a  poor 
cleric   a   seat  higher  than   distinguished   people. 


ch.  7.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  13 

But  the  bishop  said  that  some  day  it  would 
come  to  his  not  having  the  lowest  seat;  also 
he  said  it  was  not  wrong  to  set  high  those  who 
had  the  better  wits.  Afterwards  the  lord  bishop 
called  Laurence  into  his  study  and  set  out  before 
him  a  lectern  and  upon  it  a  book  of  the  Canon 
Law,  telling  him  to  amuse  himself  with  it.  Then 
said  Laurence  to  the  bishop  : — 

1  My  good  Lord,  God  requite  you  for  your  con- 
descension which  you  show  to  me,  so  poor,  so 
nameless.' 

The  bishop  answered  :  '  If  thou  hast  not  yet  fully 
comprehended  the  Canon  Law,  that  must  be  thy 
business  henceforth.  Also,  thou  shalt  come  to 
endure  many  tribulations  ere  thy  days  be  done.' 

Laurence  used  to  say  that  he  had  seen  the  face 
of  a  saint  on  two  men  only ;    on    Bishop  Ami 
Thorlaksson,  and  on  Bjarni  abbot  of  Thingeyri. 
Bishop  Ami  and  Laurence  parted  cordially.    That 
same   summer    Laurence   embarked  for 
Norway   at  Gaseyri   with   the  aforesaid      1294 
Lord   Peter,  leave  being  first  obtained 
from  Bishop  Jorund.     When  they  got  on  the  sea, 
Laurence  was  in  great  distress  from  sea-sickness. 
Then  came  Lord  Peter  to  him  and  said,  fleering  : — 

{ Priest,  in  the  winter  at  Holar,  thou  askedst  me 
what  figure  people  cut  when  the  sea  was  bad ;  and 
now  I  will  answer  all  thy  questions ;  even  as  pale 
and  peaked  as  thou  art,  Sir  Laurence.' 

Laurence  had  now  double  pangs — from  Lord 
Peter's  flouting  and  also  from  the  sea-sickness. 
They  got  a  fair  wind  and  reached  Norway  safe 


14  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  7-8. 

and  sound.  It  befell  in  that  year  that  there  was 
a  great  earthquake  in  Iceland  in  the 
MariC2h9412'  south>  before  St  Gregory's  Day,  so  that 
in  some  places  houses  fell  down.  There 
was  strife  in  Rome,  and  people  slain  in  St. 
Peter's. 

8.  Now  we  must  go  on  to  tell  how  Lord  Peter 
and  Sir  Laurence  came  to  Norway.  King  Eirek 
was  then  sojourning  in  Bergen.  The  king  re- 
ceived Lord  Peter  most  blithely,  for  he  was  a 
dear  friend  of  the  king's.  Lord  Peter  broached 
his  suit  towards  a  certain  woman  of  the  king's 
kindred,  who  lived  east  in  Vik ;  he  entreated  that 
the  king  would  write  to  her.  The  king  bade 
Lord  Peter  have  a  letter  written  in  Latin  and  told 
him  he  would  give  him  his  seal  on  it.  Then  Lord 
Peter  called  Laurence  to  him  and  bade  him  com- 
pose this  letter  in  the  best  Latin  he  knew.  Sir 
Laurence  tried  to  shirk  it,  and  said  he  was  not 
skilled  enough  for  this.  '  But,'  he  said,  '  though 
I  have  little  skill  to  do  this,  yet  am  I  bound  to  do 
what  you  will.'  Next  day  he  showed  Lord  Peter 
the  letter,  written  in  Latin.  Then  Lord  Peter 
went  to  the  king  with  the  letter  and  showed  it 
him.  The  king  praised  the  handwriting  and  style 
of  the  letter  much,  and  then  asked  who  had  done 
it.  Peter  answered  him  that  a  certain  Icelandic 
priest  had  done  it,  whom  he  had  brought  from 
Iceland.  The  king  bade  him  tell  that  priest  to 
be  at  his  banquet  for  that  day.  Even  so  Laurence 
did,  and  it  was  arranged  he  should  sit  above  the 
other  guests,  and  for  that  day  the  king  ate  and 


ch.  8.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  15 

drank  to  him.  The  next  day  a  page  of  the  king 
came  to  Sir  Laurence  and  told  him  that  the  king 
summoned  him.  He  went  to  the  king  in  his  public 
hall  and  gave  him  good-day.  The  king  received 
him  cheerily,  and  asked  whether  he  was  the  priest 
who  had  written  Lord  Peter's  Latin  letter ;  and  he 
said  that  it  was  so.  The  king  offered  him  to  wait 
upon  his  service.  Sir  Laurence  thanked  the  king 
for  his  offer,  and  said  that  he  had  leave  of  absence 
for  his  pilgrimage  to  St.  Olaf  in  Nidaros. 

1  Come  to  us,'  said  the  king,  \  when  thou  return- 
est,  and  be  at  our  banquet  for  Yule  and  all  high- 
days,  and  whensoever  thou  wilt.'  Also  through- 
out the  winter  he  was  in  the  hall  with  the  king, 
but  sometimes  at  Lord  Peter's  charges.  There 
were  there  with  King  Eirek  many  mighty  men 
from  divers  countries  and  skilled  in  many  matters. 
Among  them  was  a  man  named  Thrand  '  Cracker,' 
who  knew  of  many  clever  tricks,  but  more  by  his 
mother-wit  than  by  any  manner  of  sorcery;  he 
was  Flemish  by  race.  Sir  Laurence  struck  up  a 
friendship  with  this  man,  and  talked  about  many 
things  to  him,  for  while  he  was  young  he  went 
much  after  laying  up  of  knowledge,  and  yet  he 
never  dealt  in  sorcery  or  heathen  witchcraft.  In 
Yule  Thrand  'Cracker'  let  off  the  war-crack;  it 
comes  so  loud  that  very  few  men  could  bear  to  hear 
it,  women  with  child  fall  in  labour  when  they  hear 
it,  and  men  fall  down  out  of  their  seats  on  the 
floor,  or  are  troubled  otherwise.  Thrind  told 
Laurence  that  he  should  put  his  fingers  in  his 
ears  when  the  crack  came.     Many  men  could  not 


16  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  8-9. 

stand  it  in  the  hall  when  he  made  the  crack. 
Thrand  explained  to  Laurence  what  it  was  need- 
ful to  have  to  make  the  crack,  namely  four  things  : 
fire,  brimstone,  parchment,  and  tow.  Now  men 
often  use  this  war-crack  in  battle,  to  the  end  that 
they  who  are  not  used  to  it  may  fly  all  ways. 

9.  Next  spring  Laurence  went  north  to  Thrond- 
hjem  where  Archbishop  Jorund  abode:  between  him 
and  the  Chapter  there  was  much  dissension.  Arch- 
bishop Jorund  was  a  great  lord,  a  good  scholar,  a 

firm  friend,  very  bountiful  to  his  people, 
1295     and  the  comeliest  of  men  to  look  upon. 

A  little  before,  a  great  scholar,  John  the 
Fleming,  had  come  there.  He  had  abode  long 
in  Paris  and  Orleans,  studying,  and  was  so 
great  a  lawyer  that  there  in  Norway  there  was 
none  like  him,  and  in  this  way  the  archbishop 
found  him  a  pillar  of  strength  when  he  was 
there;  for  all  the  foremost  of  the  Chapter  were 
his  adversaries.  They  were  constantly  appealing 
to  the  Pope,  and  got  a  number  of  rescripts 
from  the  Curia  to  burden  the  archbishop.  So 
the  archbishop  was  very  glad  to  find  a  scholar 
wherever  he  could.  John  the  Fleming  was  a 
good  mediator  for  the  archbishop  in  his  disputes 
with  the  Chapter,  because  he  could  not  speak  any 
Norse,  and  the  people  could  not  understand  his 
speech ;  for  he  spoke  all  in  Latin,  French,  or 
Flemish.  At  this  time  Sir  Laurence  came  to 
Throndhjem  begging  leave  to  speak  with  Arch- 
bishop Jorund,  and  when  this  was  got,  he  showed 
him  the   permit  from  Bishop  Jorund  at   Holar, 


ch.9-]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  17 

declaring  that  he  gave  Sir  Laurence  leave  to  stay 
with  the  archbishop  as  long  as  he  liked  to  have 
him  by  him. 

Hereat  the  archbishop  was  very  glad  and  spoke 
thus :  '  Many  thanks  give  we  to  Bishop  Jorund 
because  he  sent  thee  to  us ;  thou  shalt  be  welcome 
among  us  in  the  Lord;  but  come  to  us  on  the 
morrow  and  show  us  thy  handwriting,  and  whether 
thou  canst  compose  aught  in  Latin.' 

Next  day  came  Sir  Laurence  to  the  archbishop, 
holding  a  scroll.  The  archbishop  looked  at  it,  and 
praised  the  writing  and  said,  '  Read  before  us  that 
which  thou  hast  written.' 

He  read  from  it  the  verses  which  he  had  made 
upon  Lady  Hallbera,  abbess  at  Stad. 

'Is  she  a  good  woman,'  said  the  archbishop, 
'  since  thou  hast  praised  her  so  much  ? ' 

'  People  in  Iceland,'  said  Laurence,  '  count  that 
for  certain.' 

'Cease  verse-making  henceforward,'  said  the 
archbishop,  '  and  study  rather  in  the  Canon  Law. 
Knowest  thou  not  that  Versificatura  nihil  est  nisi 
falsa  figura  ? ' 

'You  must  also  know,'  said  Laurence,  'that 
Versificatura  nihil  est  nisi  maxima  cur  a? 

Then  the  archbishop  had  John  the  Fleming 
summoned,  and  said  to  him,  'We  give  this  man 
Sir  Laurence  into  your  charge,  and  bid  you  take 
all  pains  in  teaching  him  the  Canon  Law.  We  will 
give  you  good  guerdon  for  that. — But  why  do  you 
wear  red  clothes,'  he  said  to  Sir  Laurence,  '  which 
it  is  forbidden  to  clergy  to  wear?' 

6 


18  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  9-10. 

He  said,  '  Because  I  have  no  others.' 

Then  he  whispered  to  one  of  his  pages,  who  went 
away  and  came  in  a  little  after  with  fine  brown 
clothes,  which  the  archbishop  had  worn  himself. 
Then  he  said  to  Laurence,  '  Wear  these  clothes  on 
high  days  ;  but  get  from  the  Steward  at  our  manor 
money  to  buy  you  black  clothing  to  wear  every  day  : 
but  give  these  red  clothes  to  your  page.  Sit  at 
table  on  the  Steward's  bench  by  John  the  Fleming.' 

10.  Now  to  tell  how  Sir  Laurence,  after  coming 
to  Archbishop  Jorund,  went  daily  to  study  to  learn 
Canon  Law,  and  how  sometimes  the  archbishop 
sent  him  to  declare  his  bidding  in  the  quarrels  of 
the  Chapter,  which  were  then  going  forward. 
Quickly  Laurence  became  best  beloved  by  the 
archbishop,  because  he  seemed  to  him  shrewd  and 
well-counselled,  firm,  and  quick  in  argu- 

1296  ment.  Next  winter,  in  Lent,  on  Laetare 
Jerusalem  Sunday,  the  archbishop  had 
Laurence  summoned  into  his  chapel  at  mass. 

'Forasmuch  as,'  he  said,  'this  Sunday  is  not- 
able, we  will  give  you  Olaf  s  church  here  in  the 
town,  for  it  is  now  free.' 

Laurence  thanked  him  for  all  the  good  treatment 
he  had  vouchsafed  him.  This  is  a  token  what  love 
the  archbishop  had  towards  him,  that  he  took 
thought  of  himself  and  unasked  to  give  him  a 
church  which  many  men  wanted. 

1294  In  this  year,  spoken  of  already,  Adrian  the  Hermit 
was  consecrated  Pope  on  the  day  of  the  Holy  Ghost, 
and  called  Celestinus.  There  were  standing  by  him  ten 
lepers,  and  by  God's  mercy  they  were  all  cleansed  utterly. 
Celestinus  did  not  last  quite  till  St.  John's  Eve,  and  gave 


ch.  io-ii.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  19 

up  the  Popedom,  going  back  to  his  hermitage.  Then 
one  of  the  Cardinals  Benedict  was  chosen  and  con- 
secrated, and  called  Boniface.  Eirek,  king  of  the 
Danes,  and  Duke  Christopher  took  the  Archbishop  of 

1295  Lund  and  put  him  in  a  dungeon.  Denmark  was  under 
interdict.  Bishop  Jorund  of  Hdlar  founded  a  cloister  of 
canons  at  Modruvellir,  in  the  Vale  of  Horg.  Then 
died  Lj6tr,  abbot  at  Munka-Thvera,  Then  was  the 
great  drift  of  whales  in  the  North  of  Iceland.  At  this 
time  Bishop  Jorund  also  founded  a  nunnery  at  Stad  in 
Reynisnes.     Next  year  Bishop  Jorund  made  Teit  prior 

1320  at  Modruvellir.  A  great  plague  of  boils  ran  over  Ice- 
land ;  and  twelve  yeomen  in  Skalholt  See  confirmed 
Church-property  by  oath. 

11.  Now  we  must  go  on  to  tell  how  Laurence 
was    with    Archbishop    Jorund   in    Nidaros   and 
studied  continually  in   the  Canon  Law 
which  Master  John  the  Fleming  taught     1296-8 
him.     Also  they  were  great  friends  one 
to  another.     It  seemed  great   sport  to  Laurence 
when  John  made  struggles  to  talk  Norse,  but  got 
a  very  little  way  with  it. 

Once  John  the  Fleming  said  to  Laurence;  'I 
would  thou  wouldst  intercede  with  my  Lord 
that  he  should  present  me  to  the  living  of  the 
church  of  Mary  here  in  the  town,  for  it  is  now 
empty.' 

Laurence  answered,  ■  How  should  that  be, 
when  you  do  not  know  how  to  speak  any  Norse  ?  ' 

'  I  know,'  said  John,  '  as  much  as  I  want,  and 
as  lies  upon  my  mind  to  speak.' 

'Now,'  said  Laurence,  'let  us  then  suppose 
that  the  beginning  of  the  long  fast 9  is  come.  '  It  is 
then  your  business  to  declare  before  your  parish 
folk  how  they  are  to  keep  the  long  fast.' 


20  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  11-12. 

'  In  this  wise,'  said  John  the  Fleming.  ■  Now 
Lent  is  come :  every  Christian  man  come  to 
church  :  get  him  shriven :  put  away  his  wife : 
make  no  brawling.     Nonne  sufficit  domi?ie  ? ' 

Then  Laurence  laughed  and  said,  '  The  people 
understands  not  what  Lent  is.' 

He  told  the  archbishop,  and  they  had  great 
sport  thereat.  But  they  granted  unto  John  some 
portion  of  his  request,  because  he  was  very  quick 
of  temper  if  things  were  not  done  as  he  liked. 

12.  Once  a  great  company  of  passengers  for 
Iceland  came  to  Throndhjem,  and  there  were  many 
Icelanders  among  them.  Sir  Laurence  wished  to 
do  some  service  to  each  and  all  of  them.  Among 
the  rest  came  the  man  called  Klaeng  the  '  Caster,' 
a  kinsman  of  Laurence  and  intimate  with  him. 

And  when  John  the  Fleming  saw  that,  he 
wanted  to  pay  some  attention  to  him,  and  once 
spoke  to  Laurence  in  Latin,  and  said,  '  Teach  me 
how  to  greet  this  companion  of  yours  in  Norse.' 

Laurence  thought  he  would  have  a  great  jest 
with  John  and  said,  *  Thus  greet  him :  Small 
welcome,  fellow  ! '  * 

'  I  understand,'  said  John :  '  this  must  be  a 
fair  greeting,  because  fdgnudr  means  gaudium,  and 
laus  l  praise.'  f  Afterwards  he  went  up  to  Klaeng 
the  Caster,  clapped  him  on  the  shoulders  and  said, 
1  Small  welcome,  fellow ! ' 

The  other  sharpened  his  looks  at  him,  and  he 

*   iFagnad  arlaus,  kompdn  I ' 

\  He  mixes  Latin  laus  with  Norse  laus,  'less.' 


ch.  12-13.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR,  z\ 

thought  the  greeting  could  not  be  so  fair  as  he 
had  supposed. 

Then  said  John  the  Fleming  to  Laurence, 
1  Now  I  understand  that  thou  hast  mocked  me, 
for  this  man  was  wroth  with  me.' 

John  the  Fleming  had  a  mistress  so  hideous 
and  loathsome  that  there  could  scarcely  be  found  a 
more  monstrous  aspect  than  she  wore.  Sir  Laurence 
once  asked  Master  John  wherefore  he  would 
keep  so  very  hideous  a  woman  in  his  company. 
John  answered,  '  I  am  a  hot-tempered  man,  and  I 
should  not  take  it  well  if  any  one  were  to  fool  my 
serving-woman  away  from  me,  and  therefore  I  took 
this  one  because  I  know  that  no  man  wants  her.' 

13.  It  is  said  that  now  the  discussion  of  Arch- 
bishop Jorund  and  the  Chapter  waxed  so  that  it 
broke  into  open  hatred.  His  chief  adversaries 
were  Sighvat  the  Landsman,  and  Sir  Eilff,  after- 
words archbishop  in  Nidar6s,  and  Sir  Audun  the 
Red,  afterwards  bishop  at  Holar  in  Iceland. 
They  appealed  to  Pope  Boniface :  the  end  was 
that  Archbishop  Jorund  was  summoned  to  the 
Pope,  so  he  went  out  of  the  country  to  Paris ; 
where  he  took  ill,  and  went  no  further.  Thence 
he  sent  a  message  to  the  Pope  and  then  got 
back  his  credit.  He  was  away  there  one  year 
and  then  came  back  to  Nidaros.  During  /  that 
time  Laurence  was  in  Nidaros  and  had  St.  Olafs 
Church,  as  we  told  before.  He  was  glad  when 
the  archbishop  came  back  home,  for  he  then 
appointed  Sir  Laurence  in  charge  over  the  offering 
which   was   made   to   Olaf,  saint  and   king,  and 


22  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  13. 

also  to  be  penitentiary.  Then  the  archbishop 
paid  even  more  regard  to  him  than  before, 
because  he  seemed  to  him  to  have  gone  on  deftly 
about  his  business  and  his  church  in  his  own 
absence. 

In  that  year  Bishop  Ami  Thorlaksson  departed  ; 
and  he  was  buried  at  Munklif  in  Bergen.     In  the 

next  year  died  King   Eirek  Magmisson 
1299      on  the  10th  of  July.     The  title  of  king 

was  given  to  Hakon  his  brother,  who 
was  crowned  with  the  hallowing  of  a  king  in 
Throndhjem  by  Archbishop  Jorund.  Thither 
now  came  all  the  first  men  in  Norway  and  from 
other  lands  far  and  wide.  There  could  be  seen 
the  greatest  throng  ever  known  in  the  Northern 
lands.  No  man  might  go  out  from  Eyri  and  on 
to  Christ  Church  except  with  eider-down  robes, 
costly  stuff,  and  canopy.  King  Hakon  gave  a 
magnificent  feast  and  also  many  privileges  and 
amended  laws  to  the  Holy  Church.  King  Hakon 
reconciled  the  Archbishop  and  the  Chapter.  But 
it  lasted  only  a  while,  for  the  moment  that  King 
Hakon  was  out  of  the  town,  the  same  quarrelling 
and  wrangling  arose  between  them  as  of  old.  So 
things  stayed  for  a  year.  Then  the  archbishop 
proceeded  against  them  with  admonitions,  and 
they  would  not  obey.  In  league  with  them  now 
went  all  the  people  of  the  town,  all  the  school, 
and  the  abbot  from  Holm.  The  end  was  that  no 
lettered  man  dared  or  would  execute  any  bidding 
of  the  archbishop's  which  the  Chapter  were 
against. 


- 


I4-]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  23 


14.  One  day  the  archbishop  summoned  Lau- 
rence and  said,  'Here  is  a  writ  which  John  the 
Fleming  has  made  by  our  bidding.  This  writ  thou 
art  to  read  out  against  the  Chapter  in  Christ 
Church  to-morrow  morning,  because  that  is  a  day 
of  most  high  festival.' 

Laurence  answers,  '  Mighty  is  the  masters  word ; 
I  must  do  and  forward  whatever  is  your  will  while 
I  am  in  your  service.  But  I  know  that,  little  as 
the  Chapter  have  loved  me  hitherto,  now  it  will 
be  yet  worse.' 

Accordingly  on  the  morrow  at  high  mass,  when 
the  Chapter  were  in  the  chancel,  and  when  it  was 
least  expected,  Sir  Laurence  rose  up  in  the  choir, 
according  to  the  bidding  of  the  archbishop,  and 
read  the  writ: — Rumor pestiferus !  .  .  .  This  was  the 
drift  of  the  writ,  that  for  many  and  mighty  reasons 
which  he  named,  he  laid  a  ban  on  the  Canons  Eilff, 
Audun  the  Red,  Sighvat  the  Landsman,  saying 
also  that  if  they  did  not  quit,  the  service  of  mass 
was  to  cease.  Laurence  read  so  loudly  and  well 
that  they  heard  clearly. 

Then  answered  Sighvat  the  Landsman,  saying, 
1  No  need,  Icelander,  to  bellow  so  loud,  we  hear 
what  thou  say  est.'  They  all  went  home  each  to  his 
lodging.  From  that  day  forth  Sir  Laurence  could 
never  go  out  without  danger  from  the  Chapter. 

This  year  it  befell  in   Iceland  that  fire  came 
up  from   Mount   Hekla10a  so  violently  that   the 
mountain   was   cloven,    which   will    be 
there    to   see    while   Iceland   is   dwelt       I3°° 
in.      In   this   fire    great    stones    whirled    wildly 


24  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  14. 

about  like  coal  in  hardness,  so  that,  when  they 
drove  together,  the  cracks  were  so  great  that 
it  was  heard  over  the  country  northwards  and 
far  and  wide  elsewhere.  Thence  came  so  much 
lava,  smiting  on  a  farm  in  Naefraholt,  that  the 
thatch  was  burnt  off  the  buildings.  A  wind  came 
from  the  south-west  which  carried  sand  over  the 
country  between  Vatn  Pass  and  the  Heath  of 
Oxar  Firth  so  thickly  with  so  mighty  a  darkness, 
that  no  man,  in  doors  or  out,  knew  whether  it  was 
night  or  day,  until  the  sand  fell  to  earth  in  a 
shower,  and  all  the  earth  was  hid  for  the  sand. 
On  the  next  day  the  sand  drifted,  so  that  here 
and  there  men  could  scarce  grope  their  way.  All 
these  two  days  no  man  durst  row  on  the  sea, 
because  of  the  darkness  over  the  north  country. 
This  befell  on  the   13th  of  July.     At  the  same 

time  a  fire  burst  up  in  Sicily  and  two 
Dec.  31    dioceses  were  burnt.     Likewise  on  the 

sixth  night  of  Yule,  such  a  great  earth- 
quake came  over  the  south  country  that  the  land 
shook  far  and  wide.  A  homestead  fell  in  East 
Skard ;  -  in  the  church  there  was  a  great  brazen 
caldron  fixed  against  the  ledge  of  the  beam  of  the 
church :  it  smote  with  the  shock  so  hard  against 
the  church  roof  that  the  caldron  broke.  Two 
chests  stood  in  the  porch  in  Naefraholt,  and  they 
were  clashed  by  the  earthquake  together  so  mightily 
that  both  were  brayed  into  fine  powder.  And  all 
the  chronicles  witness  that  thirteen  hundred  years 
had  gone  by  from  the  coming  upon  earth  of  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ  until  that  day. 


ch.  15.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  25 

15.  Now  to  take  up  the  story.  Many  ambushes 
were  laid  for  Sir  Laurence.  Once  it  came  to  pass 
that  the  clerks  leapt  upon  him  and  desired  to  take 
him;  and  when  he  saw  it,  he  took  to  his  heels 
and  sped  up  to  Christ  Church  and  got  hold  of  the 
ring  of  the  church  door.10  Then  they  sped  after 
him ;  then  all  at  once  they  tore  off  his  gown,  and 
meant  to  gripe  him  away  from  the  church;  and 
then  the  archbishop's  lads  came  to  help  him,  for 
he  called  out  for  their  aid.  Also  it  befell  once 
that  a  great  lady  in  the  place,  in  the  parish  of  St. 
Olaf  s  Church,  died ;  requiems  were  sung  accord- 
ing to  wont,  and  there  was  torch  and  taper.  Sir 
Laurence  with  his  fellows  sang  the  requiems. 
Then  came  many  scholars  all  at  once  and  laid 
hands  on  the  waxen  torches  and  tapers  :  they  were 
the  stronger,  and  he  had  no  power  of  defending 
himself.  On  the  morrow  the  archbishop  sent  his 
lads,  so  that  he  got  the  masses  sung  and  the  body 
lowered.  So  many  offences  and  mockeries  and 
rebuffs  did  Sir  Laurence  endure,  ever  after  he  read 
the  aforesaid  writ  before  the  Chapter,  at  the  hands 
of  the  scholars  and  of  all  their  train,  that  the  tale 
were  long  to  tell. 

Now  to  tell  how  Archbishop  Jorund  was  high 
in  the  graces  of  Lord  Hakon  the  king ;  to  whom 
wrote  the  archbishop,  showing  what  affliction  and 
disquiet  the  Chapter  brought  upon  him,  and  beg- 
ging that  he  would  come  himself  and  chastise 
them  with  royal  authority.  And  Lord  Hakon  the 
king  did  so ;  he  came  to  Throndhjem  with  a  crowd 
both  of  the  clergy  and   laity,  and   appointed   a 


26  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  15. 

moot,11  summoning  thither  the  archbishop  and  all 
the  canons,  his  adversaries,  and  all  the  great  men 
of  the  town.  The  moot  was  held  in  the  summer- 
palace.  There  was  with  King  Hakon  a  great 
doctor  called  Aki  who  had  been  studying  abroad,  a 
leading  and  eloquent  scholar,  and  he  was  retained 
to  speak  on  the  king's  behalf.  A  reading-desk 
was  set  before  him  :  he  stood  out  before  the  king's 
dais.  The  order  was  this;  the  king  and  the 
archbishop  sat  together,  and  out  in  line  from  the 
king  the  knights  and  chief  men  of  the  kingdom, 
and  out  in  line  from  the  archbishop  the  suffragans 
and  abbots,  and  beyond  them  the  Chapter.  On 
the  floor  sat  priests  and  common  folk.  And  there 
among  the  other  companions  of  the  archbishop 
was  Sir  Laurence.  Lord  Aki,  calling  with  a  loud 
voice,  gave  the  signal  for  the  people  to  hearken. 
First  he  set  to  making  an  eloquent  speech  in 
Latin,  telling  how  it  befitted  princes  both  in  tem- 
poral authority  and  spiritual  to  have  pre-eminence  : 
this  speech  of  his  lasted  long.  Then  he  trans- 
lated his  speech  and  delivered  it  in  clear  and 
eloquent  Norse ;  keeping  to  the  theme  how  it 
was  meet  for  meaner  men  to  do  homage  to  their 
betters,  not  merely  towards  the  good  and  righteous, 
but  equally  towards  such  as  are  tainted  in  their 
walk;  as  Paul  the  apostle  saith,  declaring  how 
heavy  an  iniquity  it  is  for  a  man  to  conspire 
against  his  superiors,  and  making  it  as  grievous  as 
idolatry.  Then  he  went  on  to  speak  more  boldly, 
saying  plainly  into  what  abomination  the  Chapter 
had  fallen  in  working  adversely  to  their  lord  arch- 


ch.  15-16.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  27 

bishop  :  saying  plainly  also,  that  they  might  suffer 
in  their  skins,  and  that  the  secular  arm  could 
rightfully  fall  on  them  with  the  king's  sword  and 
authority.  And  so  sharp  and  loudly  this  man 
spoke  that  many  of  the  Chapter  and  their  retainers 
shivered  in  their  shirts. 

1 6.  After  Lord  Aki's  speech,  King  Hakon  stood 
up  and  spoke  in  Latin  and  in  Norse ;  and  the  end 
of  it  was  that  he  gave  them  a  hard  choice ; — either 
those  canons  who  had  been  declared  under  the 
ban  by  the  archbishop  were  to  be  outlawed  from 
Norway  and  all  his  dominion,  they  and  all  their 
followers,  or  else  they  must  fall  down  on  the  spot 
before  the  archbishop  and  submit  all  their  case 
to  his  power  by  the  counsel  of  the  king  and  the 
chief  men;  and  yet  if  they  did  not  there  and 
then  do  the  king's  bidding,  they  should  by  no 
means  now  quit  that  chamber  unscathed.  Now, 
when  the  canons  saw  what  a  great  peril  was 
between  them  and  the  door,  they  straightway 
stood  up  and  fell  down  before  the  archbishop  and 
submitted  all  their  case  unto  his  will.  Next  day 
the  covenant  between  the  archbishop  and  the 
Chapter  was  declared.  Each  made  a  covenant  of 
peace  and  quietness  with  the  other  and  the  other's 
men :  which  covenant  was  most  loyally  kept  for 
two  years,  and  Sir  Laurence  was  now  in  peace  and 
quietness  and  well  entertained  by  Archbishop 
Jorund ;  he  was  also  penitentiary,  and  appointed 
to  the  charge  of  the  offering  to  St.  Olaf. 

We  would  not  pass  by  declaring  and  expounding 
what  befell  abroad  during  these  years.     It  is  said  that 


28  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  1 6- 1 7. 

a  rich  prince  fought  in  Rome  herself,  but  afterwards 
made  peace  with  Pope  Boniface,  taking  his  niece  to 
wife.  And  the  Lord  Pope  went  so  far  for  the  peace  of 
holy  Church  that  he  himself  solemnised  their  marriage, 
and  gave  dispensation  to  eat  meat  on  Palm  Sunday, 
but  he  forbade  any  man  doing  it  at  his  pleasure.     That 

1301  year  died  Chancellor  Bard  :  Lord  Alf  of  Kr6k  came  out, 
and  two  quarters  of  Iceland  were  appointed  unto  him, 
the  North  and  East.  Then  came  out  to  Iceland  Lodin, 
the  lawman,  with  a  writ  from  the  king.  In  the  next 
year  following  Audun  '  Oats '  was  hanged,  and  Margaret, 
who  boasted  she  was  King  Eirek's  daughter,  and  her 
husband  were  burned.  A  comet  was  seen  about 
Michaelmas  time,  by  traders  on  the  sea,  and  it  seemed 
to  them  greater  and  dimmer  than  other  stars,  and  had 
a  tail  like  a  plummet,  and  every  evening  that  they  saw 
it,  it  went  tail  foremost  from  the  north-east  northwards. 
Also  in  the  South  country  a  comet  was  seen  for  half  a 
month  on  winter  nights :  also  in  Bergen  towards  Lent, 
and  in  Rome  before  Easter.  Lord  Bishop  Jorund,  at 
Hdlar,  instituted  chanting  at  the  new  church  which  he 
had  had  built  at  Modruvellir  in  the  Horg  Valley, 
Kr6k  Alf  came  to  Norway  and  told  King  Hakon  of 

1304  many  changes  in  Iceland.  In  that  following  year  above 
spoken  of  Pope  Boniface  died  ;  Benedict  was  consecrated 
Pope,  and  Arni  Helgason  also  was  consecrated  bishop 
to  Skalholt.  Thurid,  daughter  of  Arni  of  Burgundy, 
bore  a  boy  to  Sir  Laurence,  called  Arni ;  the  same 
woman  afterwards  bore  a  boy  to  Sir  Solomon,  called 
Bard.  In  the  next  year  died  Pope  Benedict,  and  Clement 
was  consecrated  in  his  stead. 

17.  Then  came  from  Norway  to  Iceland  Alf 
Krok  with  many  writs  from  the  king  and  novellae,12 
with  these  he  went  over  the  country  and  named 
many  good  yeoman  outlaws.  At  Hegraness  moot 
and  also  at  Oddeyri  moot  the  people  rushed  at  him. 
At  Hegraness  moot  he  was  so  scared  that  he 
hardly  knew  where  to  turn  for  refuge :  the  vaga- 
bond beggars,  whooping  and  hollaing,  smote 
their  shields  against  him ;  he  was  only  saved  from 


ch.  17.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  29 

slaughter  at  their  hands  by  Lord  Th6rd  from 
Modruvellir  and  other  lords  having  him  covered 
by  their  shields.  There  was  a  fellow  called  Berg 
the  '  Wren,'  a  yeoman,  and  a  fat-headed  fool ;  he 
was  also  the  most  forward  of  all  the  freedmen  in 
harrying  Alf  at  Hegraness  moot.  And  when  Lord 
Jorund  was  billeted  at  Hof  in  Hofdastrond,  and 
was  at  table  in  the  evening,  into  the  room  burst 
the  aforesaid  Berg  the  Wren,  and  flung  himself 
down  before  the  bishop's  feet,  saying,  '  Utterly  in 
God's  hand  and  yours,  lord  bishop  ! ' 

Bishop  Jorund  asked,  'What  is  the  matter, 
Berg?' 

1 1  have  fallen  into  a  lamentable  sin,'  said  Berg ; 
'  to-day,  at  Hegraness  Thing,  I  slew  Krok-Alf.' 

Then  asked  the  bishop,  '  How  didst  thou  attack 
Alf?' 

!  My  Lord,  I  thrust  Alf  through  with  a  spear : 
now  I  offer  myself  to  whatsoever  penance  it  is  thy 
will  to  put  upon  me.' 

1  Berg,  get  up,'  said  the  bishop.  '  Berg,  thou 
hast  seen  wrong ;  for  Krok-Alf  thou  hast  not  slain, 
and  he  yet  lives.  Go  to  the  table  and  eat ;  I  will 
not  shun  commerce  with  thee :  thou  art  no  man- 
slayer.' 

'  Will  that  be  better  known  to  thee  than  me, 
bishop  ?  nay,  for  the  trouble  has  grown  yet  greater 
notwithstanding;  I  slew  yet  another  man.'  ,So 
said  Berg. 

'  Hold  thy  peace,'  said  the  bishop,  '  and  lie  not 
like  a  fool  about  thyself.  For  people  already  know 
that  thou  art  none  too  valiant,  and  art  not  tried  in 


30  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  17-18. 

fight  and  fray ;  nay,  we  deem  thee  more  of  a  coward 
than  any  man,  when  manly  prowess  is  wanted.' 

Now,  when  the  bishop  and  Berg  had  thus 
parleyed,  people  came  into  the  room  who  had  been 
at  the  moot  during  the  day,  and  told  that  Alf 
was  alive  and  journeying  to  Lord  Thdrd,  and 
meant  to  go  north  over  the  waste.  And  the 
moment  that  Berg  saw  the  people  coming  into  the 
room,  he  took  to  his  heels  and  flew  to  the  church, 
and  into  the  chancel,  and  under  the  hangings,  and 
there  he  skulked  till  the  bishop  came  to  the 
church,  and  by  talking  got  enough  pith  into  Berg 
to  make  him  go  away  with  the  rest.  Ever  after, 
Berg  seemed  a  worse  fool  than  before ;  everything 
Bishop  Jorund  had  said  proved  right ;  for  it  was 
truly  said  about  him  that  he  was  shrewder  about 
everything  and  clearer-witted  than  any  one  else  in 
Iceland  during  his  days  upon  earth.  Krok-Alf 
went  north  into  Dynhagi  and  stayed  there  through 
the  winter,  over  Yule.  Then  he  took  a  sickness 
and  died  of  it,  and  lies  at  Modruvellir  in  the  Vale 
of  Horg.  It  was  told  to  King  Hakon  that  Ice- 
landers had  slain  Alf;  but  there  were  many  to 
gainsay  this  on  oath. 

18.  Now  to  take  up  the  story :  Sir  Laurence 
was  in  Throndhjem,  in  Nidaros,  well  enter- 
tained, as  we  said  before,  by  Archbishop  Jorund ; 
but  many  felt  great  envy  at  the  eminence  which 
the  archbishop  gave  him.  One  day  it  happened 
that  the  archbishop  was  holding  a  Chapter 
with  the  canons  and  the  other  chief  clergy  that 
were  then  with  him.     They  declared,  before  the 


ch.  1 8.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  31 

archbishop,  that  it  was  meet  for  him  to  send  a 
visitor  out  to  Iceland;  and  proclaiming  that  the 
fittest  man  for  that  was  Sir  Laurence,  because  he 
was  a  good  scholar  and  an  Icelander  born.  With 
this  declaration  the  archbishop  agreed,  and  called 
Sir  Laurence  up,  declaring  that  his  will  was  to  send 
him  to  Iceland  for  a  visitation  with  authority  from 
the  archbishop.  He  bade  him  come  again  next 
day,  which  he  did.  Then  the  archbishop  said  the 
like  to  Laurence,  that  his  will  was  to  send  him  to 
Iceland.  And  thus  Laurence  answered  the  arch- 
bishop's words  : 

'My  Lord,  you  know  well  that  I  do  all  your 
will  gladly ;  but  I  know  my  own  infirmity  for  all 
such  matters,  and  especially  that  I  have  small 
practice  in  preaching  God's  message  before  the 
people ;  and  if  you  desire  that  I  adventure  on  this 
service,  send  with  me  some  preacher  to  hold  forth 
before  the  people.  I  have  even  spoken  with 
brother  Bjorn  of  the  preacher's  order;  he  is  willing 
to  go  with  me  if  you  consent ;  only,  it  must  be  so 
as  to  share  my  power  fairly  with  me,  and  to  be  in 
equal  authority  with  me.' 

Then  said  Lord  Archbishop  Jorund,  'Thou 
seest  this  thing  not  so  clearly,  Sir  Laurence,  as 
were  meet  for  thy  own  edification;  but  thou 
knowest  this  well,  how  our  Lord  saith :  omne 
regnum  in  se  divisum  desolabitur ;  yea,  it  often 
happens  that  a  kingdom  divided  against  itself  shall 
be  swiftly  desolate ;  and  there  is  seldom  agreement 
of  one  man  with  another :  also  discernment  will, 
in  this  matter,  be  given  unto  thee,  so  that  thou 


^ 


32  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  18-19. 

will  repent  greatly  of  taking  a  preaching-brother 
into  thy  company :  for  such  are  ever  ill  to  trust  in 
law-suits  and  in  all  other  fellowship.' 

Then  the  canons  held  to  it — more  for  malice 
towards  Laurence  than  for  sound  counsel — that  he 
should  never  be  suffered  to  take  brother  Bjorn  with 
him.  Then  the  plan  was  settled,  that  brother  Bjorn 
and  Sir  Laurence  were  appointed  visitors  to  Iceland 
with  equal  powers  ;  yet  the  archbishop  was  much 
more  close  and  affectionate  with  Sir  Laurence 
than  with  brother  Bjorn,  but  both  of  them  took 
the  strongest  letters  of  authority  for  their  mission. 
The  archbishop  showed  what  love  he  bore  to  Sir 
Laurence,  inasmuch  as  he  gave  him,  with  his  seal 
patent,  three  parchments — the  nature  of  such  letters 
is,  that  there  must  be  a  seal  on  them,  but  nought 
written ;  then  he,  to  whom  they  are  given  out,  is 
to  write  in  them  what  he  likes ;  swearing  first  an 
oath  not  to  write  on  them  aught  to  the  hurt  of 
him  who  issues  them,  or  to  his  Church.  And  this 
oath  Sir  Laurence  swore,  and  it  was  sealed  duly, 
two  trusty  men  of  the  archbishop's  being  by. 
Also  the  archbishop  wrote  warm  letters  out  to 
Bishops  Jorund  and  Ami,  saying  that  they  should 
show  goodwill  to  the  visitors  aforesaid  and  sup- 
port, as  far  as  their  own  authority  went.  Then 
their  visitors  got  on  board  a  ship  on  its  way 
to  Iceland,  and  took  leave  of  the  archbishop 
cordially. 

19.  Now  to  tell  how  the  visitors  put  to  sea,  had 
a  fair  voyage,  landed  at  Eyri,  in  the  south  country, 
rode  up  into  Skalholt,  and  were  nobly  welcomed 


ch.  I9-]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  33 

by  Bishop  Ami.  He  bade  them  stay  as  long  as 
they  had  a  mind,  and  gladly  they  accepted.  And 
when,  in  summer,  the  next  day  before  St.  Thor- 
lak's  Day  came,  thus  said  Laurence  to  brother 
Bjorn,  'Now  in  Skalholt  is  a  great  congregation 
from  over  all  Iceland,  and  thou,  brother  Bjorn, 
must  ponder  over  thy  morrow's  sermon,  and 
especially  upon  the  glory  of  Thorlak,  bishop  and 
saint,  for  that  is  now  most  meet.' 

Then  brother  Bjorn  answered,  '  Strange  folk  all 
ye  Icelanders  are,  calling  many  men  who  have 
grown  up  here  among  you  saints^  while  in  other 
countries  men  know  nothing  of  them.  Thus  it  is 
high  presumption  in  you  Icelanders  to  reckon  a 
man  a  saint  whom  the  archbishop  in  Nidards 
has  no  cognisance  of;  nay,  to-night,  when  the 
clergy  think  of  going  to  evensong,  I  must  rise  up 
in  the  chancel,  and  forbid  the  bishop  and  all  the 
clergy  to  sing  of  this  Thorlak,  until  he  is  legally 
acknowledged  by  our  lord  archbishop  and  all  the 
bishops  in  the  province  of  the  church  of  Nidards. 
And  I  desire  thou  wilt  do  likewise,  having  power 
equal  with  mine.' 

'Peace,  peace,'  said  Laurence,  'and  let  this 
foolishness  go  no  further,  for  all  men,  both  here 
in  the  land  and  far  and  wide  beyond  it,  know  that 
the  Bishop  St.  Thorlak  is  a  saint  in  truth,  and  did 
many  mighty  miracles,  and  yet  doeth ;  and  he  will 
surely  punish  thee  if  thou  dost  not  make  thy  peace 
with  God  and  this  blessed  bishop.' 

The  end  of  their  talk  was  that  each  held  to  his 
own  way  of  thinking.     Brother  Bjorn  called  his 


34  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  19. 

cook  and  bade  him  cook  meat  for  him  in  Skalholt, 
the  day  before  St.  ThorlaVs  Day,  which  seemed 
passing  strange.  At  evening  the  bell  rang  to  keep 
holiday,  and  when  it  was  come  to  the  time  for 
evensong,  a  man  came  in  haste  to  Laurence,  say- 
ing that  brother  Bjorn  entreated  him  to  come 
speedily.  He  went  into  the  room  where  brother 
Bjorn  lay,  and  saw  him  lying  on  his  bed,  groaning 
with  sick  sobs.13 

Then  said  brother  Bjorn  to  Laurence,  '  Friend, 
what  shall  I  do?  I  am  fallen  on  so  heavy  an 
affliction  that  something  goes  through  my  heart, 
so  that  I  think  it  most  likely,  if  this  go  on  a 
while,  I  shall  die  speedily.' 

1  Small  wonder  is  it,'  said  Laurence,  '  though 
this  befall  thee,  for  thou  spokest  very  foolishly  in 
the  morning,  in  misdoubting  the- sainthood  of  this 
goodly  servant  of  God,  the  sainted  Bishop  Thorlak, 
who  manifests  many  good  miracles,  and  as  men 
know  that  he  is  merciful  unto  them  that  call  upon 
him,  so  is  he  very  vengeful  to  them  that  trespass 
against  him.  Thus  a  certain  fool  in  England  was 
disposed  to  think  that  he  would  bring  shame  and 
gibing  upon  the  Bishop  St.  Thorlak.  He  took  a 
sausage  of  sheep's  fat  and  carried  it  before  the 
image  of  Bishop  Thorlak,  saying,  "Have  it, 
Fat-lander?  Thou  hast  come  abroad  from  Ice- 
land." This  gibe  was  avenged  so  swiftly  that  the 
hand  which  held  up  the  lard  sausage  became  stiff 
like  wood ;  and  there  he  had  to  stand  where  he 
was,  with  his  hand  on  high,  until  pious  men  prayed 
for  him,  and  he  repented  him  of  his  abomination ; 
then  he  got  free.' 


ch.  19.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  35 

'  Gladly,'  said  brother  Bjorn,  '  will  I  repent,  and 
will  consent  to  believe  every  word  said  henceforth 
about  his  glory  and  sanctity,  if  he  will  only  mend 
my  malady  and  take  it  away :  may  God  grant  this 
at  his  intercession  !  Also  on  the  morrow  I  will 
preach  before  the  good  people  of  his  laudable  life 
and  miracles.' 

And  when  he  had  thus  confessed,  straightway 
came  a  riddance  of  all  his  sickness,  so  that  he  stood 
up  whole  and  preached  finely  on  the  morrow  before 
the  people  concerning  Bishop  Thorlak,  telling 
clearly  and  bravely  what  had  befallen  him.  From 
this  event  the  Bishop  St.  Thorlak  got  glory,  renown, 
and  honour  in  everything,  even  as  he  is  worthy.14 

After  St.  Thorlak's  Day,  the  visitors  made  their 
visitation,  over  the  Southern  and  Western  quarters 
first.      Sir  Laurence  looked  hard  after 
the  performance  of  service  by  priests  of   Dec.  23 
small  lore  and  knowledge;  many  of  whom 
proved  of  light  learning,  and  among  them  a  priest 
called  Eilif  in  Gufa-dale  in  the  Western  quarter. 
At  mass  and  lessons  the  visitors  examined  him, 
and  the  issue  was  that  he  knew  hardly  a  thing 
in  either  of  these  matters. 

Then  said  Laurence,  '  Let  us  examine  him  in 
the  canticle  Audited  and  they  did  so ;  and  he 
had  no  sure  knowledge  of  how  to  read  Audited 

Priest  Eilif  said,  '  I  can  do  nothing  with  it,  if 
ye  examine  me  in  the  hardest  thing  ye  can  find.' 

1  Thou  hast  seldom  read  the  feriales  liturgiae,' 
said  Laurence,  { that  is  easy  to  see.' 

The  visitors  took  away  from  Priest  Eilif  the  mass 
and  all  the  priest's  service,  until  he  should  know  it, 


36  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  19-20. 

or  till  he  learnt  enough  to  make  him  fit  to  officiate. 
There  were  also  some  more  priests  from  whom  they 
took,  because  of  their  ignorance,  the  right  of  saying 
mass.  In  the  summer  they  visited  the  See  of 
Skalholt  and  went  to  all  the  cloisters  and  larger 
churches ;  and  in  the  Skalholt  See  they  were  not 

withstood,   for    Lord  Bishop   Ami   was 
1307      a  lowly  man  of  gentle  bearing.     In  that 

summer   Lord   Bard   came    to   Iceland 
with  writs  and  amendments  from  the  king. 

20.  Now  to  tell  how  when  the  visitors  had  gone 
over  the  See  of  Skalholt,  they  rode  to  Holar  and 
met  Lord  Bishop  Jorund.  He  received  them  both 
civilly,  but  brother  Bjorn  far  more  cordially : 
Laurence  soon  found  that  Lord  Bishop  Jorund 
invited  brother  Bjorn  to  stay  the  winter  there ; 
but  no  invitation  came  to  Laurence.  Brother 
Bjorn  accepted  the  bishop's  invitation  and  stayed 
the  winter  at  Holar.  Sir  Laurence  went  north 
over  the  fell  and  parted  from  Bishop  Jorund 
coldly.  The  bishop's  kin  did  nothing  but  scoff 
and  jeer  at  him,  casting  in  his  teeth  the  old  days 
when  Bishop  Jorund  took  him  up  a  beggar,  and 
had  him  taught ;  ■  and  now  he  claimed  to  have 
authority  over  him,  and  power,  by  the  archbishop's 
ordinance,  to  depose  him  from  his  episcopal  sway.' 
Many  despiteful  fellows  carried  a  pack  of  lies 
between  them.  Laurence  went  to  Eyja  Firth, 
and  Lord  Thord  invited  him  to  stay  the  winter 
with  him;  he  accepted,  and  stayed  the  winter 
there  with  one  lad.  Lord  Abbot  Th<5rir  was  then 
at  Munka-Thvera. 


ch.  21.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  37 

21.  In  the  spring  before  it  had  befallen  that 
Solveig,  the  daughter  of  Lopt,  wife  of  Thorvald 
Geirsson,  then  dwelling  in  Long  Slope  in  the 
Horg  Valley,  went  to  Baegis  Water  to  service  on 
the  eve  of  Maundy  Thursday,  and  one  woman 
with  her.  As  they  both  went  on,  it  happened 
that  they  went  down  into  the  Horg  river  and  were 
both  drowned.  The  body  of  goodwife  Solveig 
was  found  afterwards,  and  later  Thorvald  Geirsson 
took  his  wife's  body  to  Munka-Thvera  and  gave 
thereafter  much  offering  with  the  corpse ;  but  she 
had  a  right  of  burial  at  Baegis  Water,  where  then 
dwelt  the  priest  called  Hildibrand  Grfmsson. 
There  had  been  no  love  lost  between  Sir  Hildi- 
brand and  Thorvald ;  likewise  there  was  a  coolness 
between  Solveig  and  the  wife  of  Thorvald  :  the 
priest  was  for  ever  comforting  Solveig  with  holy 
counsel.  It  was  much  treasure  which  Thorvald 
gave  to  Miinka-Thvera  as  an  offering  for  her  soul ; 
but  to  Baegis  Water  he  merely  gave  twelve  ells 
for  a  burial-fee.  Then  in  spring  Sir  Hildibrand 
complained  to  Bishop  Jorund,  but  it  came  to 
nothing.  Afterwards  Sir  Hildibrand  came  to  Sir 
Laurence  at  Modruvellir  in  Eyja  Firth,  and  com- 
plained to  him  that  he  thought  he  had  a  claim  to 
the  offering  and  the  burial-service ;  also  that  her 
body  had  a  right  to  burial  in  the  churchyard 
at  Baegis  Water;  moreover  her  own  will  and 
testament  did  not  declare  that  she  had  chosen 
burial  anywhere  else  save  at  her  own  parish 
church  in  Baegis  Water.  Laurence  wrote  a  letter 
to  Thorvald  admonishing    him   to    dispose   the 


38  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  21. 

body  to  be  taken  back  to  Baegis  Water,  or  else 
come  to  an  agreement  with  the  priest  and  dispose 
fittingly  with  the  church  by  a  gift  for  her  soul, 
while  her  body,  with  Sir  Hildibrand's  leave,  should 
have  free  burial  in  Munka-Thverd.  Thorvald 
took  this  letter  coldly,  professing  that  he  cared 
nothing  for  what  he  said,  but  meant  to  have  the 
decision  of  Bishop  Jorund.  Afterwards  Hildi- 
brand  went  to  Munka-Thvera  and  claimed  the 
body,  demanding  it  back  for  that  place  of  burial 
which  was  its  due;  afterwards  he  entreated  the 
visitors  to  hear  the  case  and  give  him  his  rights. 

Then  Sir  Laurence  admonished  the  abbot  and 
brethren  to  give  up  the  body  freely  or  else  come 
to  a  bargain  with  the  priest.  The  abbot  and 
brethren  answered  coldly  and  appealed  to  Bishop 
Jorund,  saying  they  heeded  his  words  never  a  whit. 
Afterwards  at  home  at  Modruvellir  Laurence  made 
a  writ,  and  went  to  Munka-Thvera,  and  one  saint's 
day  went  up  into  the  choir,  and  with  letters  patent 
laid  his  judgment  upon  them,  namely;  that  the 
body  of  Solveig,  daughter  of  Lopt,  had  right  of 
burial  at  Baegis  Water :  and  forbidding  per- 
formance of  mass  there  in  the  church  while  her 
body  lay  there  in  the  churchyard.  Their  abbot 
and  brethren  asked  Laurence  to  give  them  a 
copy  of  the  judgment  Laurence  bade  them  take 
the  judgment,  and  declared  he  would  give  them  a 
copy  then  or  never;  then  straightway  they 
departed  with  it.  Next  the  abbot  wrote  west  to 
Bishop  Jorund  and  brother  Bjorn,  and  they  gave 
leave  to  sing  again  as  before  in  the  church.     Lord 


ch.  21-22.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  39 

Bishop  Jorund  and  brother  Bjorn  wrote  north  by 
the  hand  of  Sir  Snjdlf;  the  main  thing  in  the 
message  was  that  they  wished  Laurence'  writ  of 
judgment  to  be  delivered  over  into  Snjdlf's  hand, 
for  censure  in  case  he  had  decided  hastily  and  not 
heeded  the  law.  It  had  also  been  said  in  the  north 
that  it  had  been  read,  and  that  was  not  proved. 
Sir  Snjdlf  came  to  Miinka-Thvera  with  the  aforesaid 
ordinance ;  the  message  was  also  sent  to  Sir 
Laurence  and  Sir  Thdrd.  They  came  ;  Snjdlf  read 
out  the  letter  of  Bjorn  the  visitor,  giving  leave  to 
chant  in  the  church,  till  Bishop  Jorund  and  he 
should  take  evidence  in  court  after  Easter.  Bishop 
Jorund  wrote  to  the  same  effect.  Snjdlf  called  on 
Laurence  to  read  out  his  writ  of  judgment ;  then 
Laurence  read  the  writ,  and  when  the  writ  was 
finished,  the  abbot  and  many  with  him  in  the  church 
snatched  at  the  writ,  and  tore  writ  and  seal  away. 
Then  Laurence  and  his  friend  were  haled  and 
thrust  out  of  church  and  churchyard,  and  there  was 
no  more  violence  done  to  men's  hurt.  Laurence 
had  such  odds  against  him,  that  it  was  doubtful  if 
he  would  not  have  received  hurt  had  not  Lord 
Thdrd  given  him  help  and  aid.  Thus  began  the 
estrangement  of  Laurence  and  Bishop  Jorund. 
Then,  as  often,  Snjolf  was  the  chief  adversary  of 
Laurence.  There  was  peace  now  till  after  Easter. 
22.  After  the  day  of  Bishop  John  of  Hdlar, 
Lord  Jorund  and  brother  Bjorn  rode 
north  to  Modruvellir  in  the  Horg  April  23 
Valley,  and  summoned  before  them 
Hildibrand,  the  priest  at  Baegis  Water,  and  like- 


4o  LIFE  OF  LA  URENGE  [ch.  22. 

wise  Thdrir,  the  abbot  at  Munka-Thvera,  and  the 
bishop  made  covenant  of  peace  between  them. 
Solveig's  body  was  to  have  free  burial  at  Munka- 
Thvera.  But  the  priest  got  off  somewhat  poorly. 
For  the  end  of  the  suit  was  that  Bishop  Jorund 
was  complete  master  over  whatever  men  in  the 
See  of  Holar  there  were  to  deal  with.  For  finally 
all  men  were  willing  to  sit  down  and  stand  up 
and  let  all  things  go  according  to  his  will ;  for  he 
was  wise  in  all  the  wisdom  of  this  world,  and  free 
with  his  money.  To  this  covenant  Laurence  was 
no  party ;  yet  he  rode  to  Modruvellir  to  meet 
them ;  and  then  came  his  parting  and  estrange- 
ment from  brother  Bjorn ;  it  was  plain  that 
brother  Bjorn  would  let  everything  go  according 
to  the  will  of  Bishop  Jorund.  Laurence  made 
this  request  of  him,  that  they  should  heed  the 
archbishop's  bidding,  visiting  from  church  to 
church  and  looking  after  church  causes.  Brother 
Bjorn  declared  he  would  not  drift  about  the 
desert  in  Holar  diocese,  but  would  go  south  to  his 
ship,  and  go  back  to  Norway. 

'  This  is  my  wish,'  said  Laurence,  '  that  we  heed 
as  best  we  can  my  lord  archbishop's  business,  and 
visit  over  all  Holar  diocese,  and  get  afterwards  on 
the  ship  that  is  now  here  at  Gaseyri,  and  go  back 
in  it  to  Norway  in  the  summer.' 

1  Do  as  seems  good  to  thee,'  said  brother  Bjorn  ; 
1  thou  keepest  me  not  from  my  purpose.' 

Now  the  plan  Bishop  Jorund  had  made  with  him 
really  was  that  he  should  embark  from  the  South, 
and  reach  Norway  ere  Laurence,  and  defame  his 
doings. 


ch.  22.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  41 

'  Then  wilt  thou  be  willing  to  consent  that  I  take 
upon  me  the  business  of  us  both,'  said  Laurence. 

'  Manage  as  thou  likest,'  said  brother  Bjorn. 

Brother  Bjorn  went  back  home  to  Hdlar  with 
Bishop  Jorund,  and  there  Laurence  parted  with 
him,  and  thought  he  himself  had  fallen  into  a  heavy 
plight ;  all  his  business  in  the  North  quarter  un- 
performed !  He  took  counsel  thereon  with  his 
friends,  what  was  next  to  be  done ;  for  he  perceived 
all  the  counsel  of  Bishop  Jorund,  knowing  his  wish 
was  to  have  a  swift  riddance  of  the  visitors.  North 
of  the  heath  they  counselled  him  to  assume  all 
authority  and  visit  on  visitor's  business,  and  oppose 
Bishop  Jorund  if  he  would  not  hearken  to  the  arch- 
bishop's bidding.  Then  he  wrote  to  his  dear 
friend  Haflidi  Steinsson,  asking  his  counsel.  He 
wrote  back,  that  he  should  go  back  in  the  same  ship 
as  brother  Bjorn,  and  meet  the  Archbishop  and 
Chapter  at  the  same  time  as  he ;  but  he  bade  him 
beware  most  of  all  lest  he  opposed  Bishop  Jorund 
in  anything,  or  wrought  at  all  against  his  will, 
saying  that,  good  scholar  as  he  was,  that  was  not 
enough  to  make  him  prevail  over  Bishop  Jorund 
because  of  the  luck  and  lordship  that  was  his;  and 
that  he  might  do  himself  great  harm  by  striving 
with  him  in  any  way. 

And  when  this  advice  came  back  to  Laurence, 
he  said,  ■  I  know  that  Sir  Haflidi,  my  comrade, 
wishes  me  well ;  but  for  the  love  and  friendship  he 
bears  Bishop  Jorund,  he  will  not  hear  of  any  man 
speaking  or  acting  against  him ;  but  I  am  bound 
to  do  my  lord  archbishop's  bidding.' 

So  he  took  up  the  harder  way  for  himself,  of 


42  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  22-23. 

staying  behind  in  the  Northern  quarter.  But 
brother  Bjorn  went  first  to  Skalholt  and  then  on 
board.  He  was  then  given  many  fine  gifts  by 
Bishop  Jorund,  who  sent  a  letter  abroad  by  him 
to  the  Archbishop  and  Chapter. 

In  that  winter,  then  past,  this  had  befallen  in 
the  south  of  Iceland;  so  mighty  an  earthquake 
came,  that  eighteen  farms  fell  down  because  of  it. 
And  in  Norway  the  news  was  that  Lord  Arch- 
bishop Jorund  fell  very  sick,  in  this  way ;  that  gout 
first  attacked  his  leg,  and  then  struck  up  into  his 
body.  The  Chapter  took  unto  them  all  rule  and 
authority  in  temporal  even  as  in  spiritual  matters, 
so  that  there  remained  by  him  only  two  lads  and 
his  cook.  All  were  now  turned  out  who  had 
heretofore  been  his  friends  or  supporters  in  law- 
suits. 

23.  Now  to  take  up  the  story.  Brother  Bjorn 
being  gone  from  H61ar  diocese,  and  Laurence  left, 
Laurence  was  prompted  by  some  to  start  on  his 
visitor's  business,  and  he  did  so.  No  man  heeded 
his  word;  every  claimant  appealed  to  Bishop 
Jorund,  and  no  entertainment  was  given  him  as  he 
journeyed.  Then  he  rode  home  to  H61ar,  and 
asked  the  bishop  to  yield  him  a  night's  lodging  at 
his  bishop's  seat ;  the  bishop  said  he  was  not 
bound  to,  because  the  other,  his  equal  in  authority, 
had  left  the  bishopric.  Laurence  said,  that  though 
he  would  fain  disregard  visiting  or  looking  after  the 
archbishop's  business  before  he  were  worn  to 
death,  yet  he  would  liefer  proceed  with  his  bounden 
duty.     About  this  the  bishop  and  Laurence  came 


ch.  23.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  43 

to  no  terms.  Then  on  a  high-day,  which  was  near 
at  hand,  Laurence  went  up  into  the  choir  and 
spoke  of  many  sins,  which  went  on  there  at  home 
at  the  seat,  and  chiefly  of  filthy  living  and  incests. 
■  This  touched  the  daughters  of  Bodvar,  kinswomen 
of  the  bishop,  most  home,  '  since,'  he  said,  '  no  man 
heard  of  their  paying  public  penance,  fasting,  or 
standing  outside  the  church  door ;  and  it  was  just 
the  same  far  and  wide  over  in  H61ar  diocese ;  and 
there  was  much  reckless  conduct.'  Straightway  a 
clamour  arose.  In  the  hearing  of  all  he  ended 
his  discourse  by  saying  that  men  should  quit  their 
evil  ways  and  turn  and  mend.  To  this  admonish- 
ings  and  helpful  teaching,  the  bishop's  kinswomen 
heeded  not  a  whit;  nay,  when  he  came  out  of 
church,  after  mass,  he  got  revilings  and  many 
words  of  contumely  from  the  bishop's  kindred. 
There  were  so  many  differences  now  between 
Bishop  Jorund  and  Laurence,  that  at  last  it  broke 
into  open  feud.  Laurence  saw  that,  now  that  the 
bishop  was  so  adverse  to  him,  he  could  carry  out 
no  chastisement  upon  the  people,  so  he  took  pass- 
age in  the  Gaseyri  ship.  Bishop  Jorund  also  sent 
abroad  a  certain  priest  of  his  own  called  Gudmund 
Hallddrsson,  with  much  treasure  and  gifts  to 
the  Archbishop  and  Chapter,  and  letters  against 
Laurence. 

Bishop  Jorund  was  becoming  very  worn  with 
years  j  he  had  long  kept  at  home  and  was  loath  to 
visit  or  vex  himself.  Laurence  had  made  note  of 
many  suits,  which  had  gone  on  to  his  knowledge 
in  a  very  slovenly  fashion,  specially  suits  about 


44  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  23. 

marriage.  At  the  last,  when  the  traders  were 
ready  to  sail,  Laurence  went  to  H61ar,  and  then 
had  an  interview  with  the  bishop.  Then  Laurence 
read  out  all  the  heads  he  had  drawn  up  about  the 
careless  and  lawless  ways  of  the  bishop. 

'Nor  will  I  hide  from  you,  my  lord  bishop, 
that  all  these  things  I  will  read  out  before  the 
archbishop.' 

Then  Bishop  Jorund  spoke  more  softly,  and 
thus  said :  '  I  ask  you  this,  Sir  Laurence,  that 
we  let  our  suit  drop,  and  write  in  harmony  with 
one  another ;  we  will  write  about  thee  favourably 
to  the  archbishop ;  tear  this  letter  in  pieces  which 
thou  now  hast  read  out  touching  it,  and  swear  an 
oath  of  faith  and  fealty  to  us.' 

Laurence  said,  'I  know  that  so  great  is  your 
kingdom,  power,  and  lordship,  that  you  can  over- 
come and  put  me  down ;  but  not  so  much  as  to 
make  me  break  that  oath  which  I  swore  before  my 
Lord  archbishop,  that  I  would  tell  him  truly  of  the 
doings  of  the  bishops  and  suits.' 

And  scarce  had  he  got  the  words  out,  when 

Bishop  Jorund  leapt  up  straightway,  and  Laurence 

could  get  no  speech  with  him,  and  so  they  parted. 

Laurence  went  north  to  Gaseyri,  and  so  on  board. 

The    traders    put    to    sea   nigh  on    St. 

"!"0g7,    Bartholomew's  Day.     They  had  a  poor 

wind  and  were  long   at   sea.     At  first 

they  went  north    towards  Nauma-dale,  and  then 

Se  they     had    a    good    south    wind,    and 

'  29    got  into  Throndhjem  in  autumn  nigh  on 

Michaelmas  Day.     Now  of  Bjorn  it  is  to  be  told, 


ch.  23-24.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  45 

that  he  had  got  to  Throndhjem  on  the  latter  St. 
Mary's   Day,   and  had   come  with   the 
letters  and  ordinance  of  Bishop  Jorund,     Sep.  8 
bringing   lying   tales   of  Laurence,   and 
stating  that  he  had  read  out  in  Iceland  many  writs 
of  the  archbishop,  which  he  said  he  knew  not  how 
Laurence   had  come  at.     The  Chapter  gave  ear 
eagerly  to  this  deliverance  of  Bjorn  ;  and  the  plan 
was  straightway   laid,  that  as   soon  as  Laurence 
arrived  from  Iceland,  all  his  goods,  letters,  and 
documents  should  be  seized,  and  he  thrust  into  a 
dungeon.     Bjorn  slandered  him  as  best  he  could ; 
but  most  credit  was  given  to  what  Bishop  Jorund 
had  written  out  to  the  Archbishop  and  Chapter. 

24.  Now  to  tell  how  Laurence  had  himself 
taken  from  the  merchant-ship  into  the  town, 
knowing  nothing  of  what  was  afoot.  They  had 
landed  at  H61m  with  no  thought  of  alarm.  The 
Chapter  had  news  of  this  at  once,  and  sent  their 
men  with  a  few  clerics  down  to  the  pier ;  and  as 
soon  as  Laurence  thought  of  disembarking,  and 
stepped  on  the  pier,  the  clerics  gripped  him,  saying, 
'  Thou,  Laurence,  art  to  come  with  us ;  a  lodging  is 
made  ready  for  thee,  whereto  we  must  escort  thee.' 

Then  straightway  a  crowd  of  men-at-arms  rushed 
on  him,  and  at  first  led  him  amidst  them;  and 
when  he  saw  he  was  taken,  he  tried  to  break  away ; 
then  they  dragged  and  carried  him  in  turn,  and 
cruelly  enough,  till  they  came  to  a  dungeon. 
It  was  most  foul  and  called  Gulskitni.  Down 
into  this  he  was  kicked  and  plunged;  it  was 
cold    and    foul    both,   and    so    dark   he    could 


46  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  24. 

hardly  discern  his  own  hands.  Then  an  iron 
door  was  locked  which  was  over  the  dungeon. 
When  Laurence  came  down  on  the  stone  wall,  he 
fell  in  a  swoon ;  and  when  he  came-to,  he  crossed 
himself  and  bade  God  help  him.  Then  he  raised 
himself  up  and  found  that  the  place  could  not 
hold  over  three  men  together.  Nor  was  any  living 
thing  there.  All  this  that  has  just  been  told  was 
done  so  swiftly  that  this  man  Laurence  never  got 
word  or  oath  in  his  own  behalf  to  absolve  him  or 
help  his  case;  and  as  soon  as  it  was  done,  the 
people  went  to  the  canons  and  told  them  what 
was  done.  Then  they  sent  some  people  out  to 
the  merchant-ship  to  seize  the  goods  Laurence 
had  had  in  the  ship ;  but  the  merchants  were  so 
faithful  that  they  would  not  say  a  word  to  them, 
but  straight  snatched  up  their  arms  and  made 
as  if  they  would  fight  to  prevent  them  ransack- 
ing there.  Then  they  took  his  lad  whom  he 
had  had  with  him,  and  tried  to  force  him  to 
speak;  but  this  he  by  no  means  would.  Still, 
they  were  told  by  a  Thrond  trading  lad  where  his 
boxes  were.  Straightway  there  were  seized  and 
carried  off  to  the  bishop's  house  all  the  goods  he 
had,  great  and  little,  into  the  hands  of  the  canons 
and  of  Nidar6s  Church :  the  boxes  were  broken 
open ;  and  all  his  writs  and  documents  were  con- 
fiscated from  him  and  read  before  the  Chapter. 
They  said  that  they  did  not  know  how  some  of 
the  writs  which  he  had,  had  come  into  his  hands, 
for  the  archbishop  had  never  issued  them  to  him. 
Yet  this  was  not  in  the  least  tested.     On  the  day 


•: 


.  24.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  47 


after  Laurence  was  flung  into  the  dungeon,  the 
canons  held  a  Chapter:  no  man  got  in  to  hear 
them,  and  people  did  not  know  what  they  were 
dealing  with.  Now  to  tell  of  Laurence.  4le  was 
two  nights  in  the  dungeon,  and  the  keeper  of  the 
dungeon  brought  him,  night  and  morning,  bread 
and  a  little  bacon  and  sour  small  beer;  of  this 
he  could  take  hardly  anything.  There  was  a  con- 
course both  of  those  who  had  been  the  archbishop's 
servants  and  many  who  had  been  Laurence' 
friends  in  the  town  when  he  was  duly  honoured ; 
and  they  said  plainly  to  the  canons  that  these 
were  sorry  doings  of  theirs,  to  seize  a  man  and 
starve  him  in  a  dungeon  before  inquiry  was  made 
of  what  he  had  done,  or  before  his  suit  came  on 
after  inquiry.  The  Chapter  said  it  was  easily 
proved  that  he  had  gone  to  Iceland  with  a  forged 
writ,  had  got  at  the  archbishop's  seal,  and  under 
it  had  written  letters  enacting  what  he  himself 
wanted.  Then  people  said,  'Why  was  he  not 
to  be  allowed  a  meeting  with  the  archbishop  ? ' 
'Because,'  they  replied,  'the  archbishop  was  so 
wroth  with  him  on  account  of  brother  Bjorn's 
report  and  Bishop  Jorund's  letter  that  he  would 
on  no  account  see  him.'  This  was  a  lie  of 
theirs;  for  the  Chapter  seized  for  themselves  all 
writs  and  ordinances.  They  decided  all  cases, 
and  ruled  all  things,  temporal  even  as  spiritual; 
but  the  archbishop  lay  in  his  agony  with  all  power 
confiscated  from  him.  Eilff,  chosen  archbishop 
afterwards,  was  Official ; 16  while  Sir  Audun  the  Red 
was  the  greatest,  richest,  and  most  thought  of  of  all 


48  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE         [ch.  24-25. 

the  canons,  Sighvat  the  Landsman  being  now 
dead.  Eilif  and  Audun  bore  heaviest  upon  Lau- 
rence because  of  his  having  long  ago  read  the 
writ  of  ban  over  them  in  the  choir  when  no  man 
else  dared  to.  Sir  Solomon  was  newly  made 
canon,  having  left  his  studies  but  a  short  while 
ago ;  he  and  other  two  likewise  never  went  against 
Laurence ;  but  all  the  rest  were  his  adversaries. 

25.  Now  to  go  back  to  tell  how,  when  he  had 
been  famished  two  nights  in  the  dungeon,  the 
canons  had  him  summoned.  They  all  sat  on  the 
bench,  as  the  custom  was ;  but  he  was  put  down 
on  the  floor  with  fetters  on  his  feet ;  he  spoke  very 
low,  for  he  had  been  far  gone  in  the  dungeon,  and 
before  that  sea-worn ;  and  so  it  was  to  be  expected 
that  he  would  not  speak  very  loud.  Yet  he 
greeted  them.  They  answered  him  never  a  word. 
Then  they  spoke :  '  Higher  much  was  thy  howl- 
ing, Sir  Laurence,  when  thou  readest  the  writ  of 
ban  over  us.' 

1  Be  not  wroth  with  me  for  it,'  said  he,  '  though 
I  did  my  lord's  bidding.' 

1  Now,'  they  said,  '  there  shall  be  manifest  and 
revealed  the  charges  that  are  brought  against 
thee.' 

Then  there  was  read  the  deed  they  had  drawn, 
saying  that  two  charges  were  brought  against  him ; 
one,  that  he  had  forged  letters  of  the  archbishop's ; 
but  this  in  chief,  that  he  had  squandered  the  goods 
and  offerings  of  St.  Olaf  when  he  had  to  receive  the 
offering  and  was  appointed  by  the  archbishop  there- 
to.    This  charge  had  never  been  brought  against 


ch.  25.  J  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  49 

him  ere  he  went  to  Iceland.  Then  were  read  the 
letters  written  by  Jorund,  bishop  of  Holar,  to 
weigh  against  him.  Then  Laurence  was  asked, 
would  he  confess  to  these  things  without  force 
being  used  ?  if  so,  they  would  look  kindly  on  his 
case. 

Then  he  said,  '  Now,  how  ye  will  deal  with  me 
lies  in  your  power — whether  I  am  to  keep  alive 
or  no ;  but  what  I  have  not  done,  that  will  I  never 
acknowledge.' 

Then  started  up  certain  of  the  canons,  saying, 
'He  has  not  been  tried  hard  enough  yet;  he 
will  have  much  more  to  say  if  he  goes  back  to 
Gulskitni.' 

Then  a  choice  of  two  things  was  offered  him : 
to  make  there  in  Norway  just  what  confession  the 
official  drew  up  for  him;  or  else  to  go  back  to 
Iceland  under  Bishop  Jorund's  authority  and  stay 
in  prison  till  he  sailed. 

'I  will  take,'  said  Laurence,  'what  most  men 
least  expect.  I  choose  that  ye  send  me  back  to 
Iceland  under  Bishop  Jorund's  authority.' 

The  Official  proclaimed  that  the  holy  church  of 
Nidar6s  should  keep  all  the  baggage  he  had  come 
with.  A  lodging  was  got  for  him ;  it  had  a  window, 
so  that  he  could  read  his  Hours;  and  for  his  victuals 
there  was  brought  him  a  little  bread  and  one  other 
dish  and  a  little  small  ale  to  wash  it  down;  by 
night  he  had  fetters  on  his  feet ;  his  feet  swelled 
up,  and  the  scurvy  flew  to  his  body.  Icelanders 
were  always  coming  to  the  window  and  talking 
with  him ;  many  men  brought  him  food  and  drink, 

D 


50  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  25-26. 

so  that  he  had  no  lack  for  that.  This  was  told 
the  canons,  and  they  put  iron  spikes  outside 
against  the  window,  so  that  none  should  be  able 
to  talk  with  him.  The  woman  named  Thurid, 
daughter  of  Ami,  by  whom  he  had  had  a  boy 
Ami,  often  came  to  the  window  to  him  and 
brought  him  somewhat,  as  best  she  could,  for  food 
or  comfort  to  him. 

26.  Now,  when  he  was  in  these  straits,  many 
looked  on  him  with  eyes  of  compassion  and  showed 
him  in  word  or  deed  some  solace.  The  canons  were 
as  fierce  towards  him  as  ever ;  and,  that  he  could 
have  any  exculpation  from  his  charges, — that  was 
not  a  thing  to  be  heard  of.  Once  it  befell  that  he 
had  got  leave  to  go  into  the  archbishop's  lodging 
where  he  lay  in  his  sickness,  though  this  was  at 
first  without  the  chapter's  knowledge.  As  soon 
as  Laurence  had  come  into  the  lodging  with  the 
fetters  on  his  feet,  the  spies  and  eavesdroppers  of 
the  Chapter  were  ware  of  it;  then  he  was  haled 
out  and  not  dealt  with  gently.  The  archbishop 
asked  what  that  brawling  was  in  the  lodging; 
he  was  told  that  Laurence  had  come  into  the 
room  and  would  have  talked  with  him,  and  was 
in  fetters,  and  had  then  been  dragged  out  vio- 
lently. 

Then,  with  a  heavy  sigh,  said  the  archbishop, 
'God  requite  him  for  the  heavy  dealing  he  has 
to  endure  of  his  adversaries ;  and  this  he  suffers  for 
the  stout  service  he  did  us.  But  what  will  it  serve 
him  to  meet  us  here  where  the  pang  is  only 
doubled  by  our  looking  in  each  other's  face?  in 


ch.  26-27.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  51 

me  he  will  see  sickness  and  sorrow,  I  misery  in 
him.' 

Then  answered  a  servant  of  the  archbishop, 
'  It  seems  heaviest  of  all  to  him,  that  he  is 
told  this  is  thy  doing  that  he  is  so  sore 
dealt  with;  and  that  this  is  all  done  by  thy 
bidding.' 

Then  said  the  archbishop,  '  Why  will  folk  say 
so?  That  is  not  my  bidding  a  whit.  Thou 
mayest  know,  that  when  we  fell  on  this  sickness, 
the  canons  stopped  all  authority  from  us  in 
spiritual  as  in  temporal  matters;  and  so  little 
do  we  appoint  or  rule  aught,  that  we  do  not 
even  manage  our  daily  food  and  drink:  and 
they  are  fiercer  than  that  to  all  those  who  stood 
on  our  side  when  we  had  to  withstand  them  in 
law-suits.  Now  it  is  plain  that  God  forbids  not 
that  things  stay  thus  a  while;  but  let  Laurence 
be  told  to  bear  him  as  manfully  as  he  may ;  for 
if  he  keeps  alive  there  is  hope  that  God  may 
make  manifest  which  side  has  stood  more  in  the 
right. 

This  was  told  Laurence,  and  he  got  much  com- 
fort of  the  archbishop's  words.  Now  the  canons 
kept  on  Laurence  stronger  ward  than  ever,  so  that 
he  could  never  stir  or  get  out. 

27.  All  Laurence'  goods  were  seized,  as  we  said, 
and  taken  up  into  the  archbishop's  house;  and 
the  books  which  he  had  were  filched.  It  was  done 
craftily,  thus ;  various  priests  from  Iceland,  winter- 
ing then  at  Throndhjem,  claimed  them  for  their 
own.      All  winter  was  Laurence  thus  in  prison, 


52  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE         [ch.  27-28. 

and  it  was  God's  mercy  that  he  stayed  alive,  and 
past   all  nature  that   his   health   broke 

Ai3oa°'  not-     *n  sPring>  f°ur  nignts  before  the 
feast  of  Tiburtius  and  Valerian,  Arch- 
bishop Jorund   departed  this  life.      Then    Eilif, 
whom  we  noticed  before,  was  chosen  archbishop ; 
a  man  of  good  life. 

In  Iceland,  where  there  was  much  lamenting,  the 
news  was  that  Skalholt  Church  was  burnt  on  the  eve 
of  Paul's  Day,  as  swiftly  as  men  swallow  meat  before 
Jan.  25.  drinking.  There  was  neither  ember  nor  charcoal,  for 
that  fire  came  down  from  heaven.  Then  died  in  Ice- 
land Hoskuld,  the  abbot  of  Thingeyri,  and  many 
priests  ;  also  Sir  Gamli,  at  Hoskul  Stad,  a  goodly 
preacher,  who  had  power  over  priest  and  laymen, 
and  a  good  yeoman.  That  was  called  the  Deadly 
Spring.  Then  was  also  Lord  Kolbein  Bjarnason 
slain  by  Charlemagne  and  Thorstein.  In  Norway 
was  slain  Ogmund  '  Ungin-dance.'  There  was  war  in 
Norway  from  the  foray  of  Eirek  duke  of  the  Swedes. 
Lord  Bishop  Arni  voyaged  out  after  the  church  fire. 

28.  Now  to  tell  how  the  chapter  put  Laurence 
in  chains  on  a  trader,  and  sent  a  letter  out  with 
him  to  Bishop  Jorund.  He  was  stripped  of  all 
his  goods,  besides  that  which  he  prized  dearest — 
his  books  with  the  holy  Church  law  in  them  :  and 
these  were  filched.  They  put  to  sea,  the  voyage 
prospered,  and  they  landed  safe  and  sound  at 
Gaseyri.  The  traders,  when  they  got  to  sea, 
straightway  smote  the  fetters  off  Laurence,  saying 
it  was  not  the  custom  to  carry  folk  in  gaol  or 
durance  over  the  high  seas.  The  canon's  message 
was  speedily  delivered  to  Bishop  Jorund,  wherein 
they  sent  Sir  Laurence  to  be  under  his  jurisdiction, 


ch.  28.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  53 

and  told  the  way  in  which  they  imagined  that 
they  had  received  evidence  in  his  case ;  as  was 
recorded  above.  Laurence  came  home  to  H61ar ; 
and  when  he  went  into  the  lodging  where  the 
bishop  was,  he  fell  on  his  knees.  But  the  bishop 
stood  up  opposite  him,  and  bade  him  sit  by  him, 
and  so  he  sat  down  at  the  dinner-table.  The 
bishop  was  most  cordial  to  him,  and  bade  Sir 
Laurence  sleep  there  three  nights.  He  did  so ; 
and  when  they  were  past,  the  bishop  had  Laurence 
called  into  the  vestry  with  some  priests ;  then  he 
made  him  read  out  the  ordinance  of  the  arch- 
bishop-elect and  likewise  of  the  canons.  Then 
Laurence  asked  the  bishop  how  it  was  to  go  with 
his  case. 

1  Because  of  the  doings  of  the  Chapter  I  dare 
not  let  thee  chant  mass  again;  but  I  tell  thee, 
that  thou  shalt  go,  for  all  I  care,  freely  over 
Iceland,  whither  thou  wilt;  likewise  in  Skalholt 
See,  if  thou  likest  to  come  down  there,  or  in  the 
monasteries.  Also  thou  canst  do  much  service 
by  educating  and  teaching,  a  matter  wherein  thou 
canst  do  well.' 

1  Nought,'  said  Laurence,  '  seems  to  me  so  hard 
as  this,  that  I  may  not  have  the  mass  service.' 

'That  thou  gettest  not,'  said  the  bishop,  and 
sprang  up  and  left  the  lodging. 

Next  night  Laurence  was  at  H61ar  and  a  strange 
dream  came  to  him.  He  thought  he  was  standing 
up  beyond  the  choir  lectern,  and  held  a  holy 
wafer  high  up,  as  the  priest  holds  it  at  mass  ; 
on  this  wafer  was  marked  Alpha  and  Omega.     A 


54  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  28. 

priest  had  come  south  thither  over  the  fell,  old, 
but  full  of  precious  lore.  Next  morning  they 
two  were  reading  the  services  together.  Laurence 
told  him  his  dream. 

The  priest  said,  '  In  the  spot  where  thou 
wentest  up  beyond  the  lectern  here  at  H61ar, 
there  shalt  thou  be  set  and  appointed  over  that 
choir  of  clergy  that  is  here  at  H61ar.  Thou 
heldest  up  the  wafer ;  thereby  shalt  thou  have  the 
highest  authority  and  ministration  in  thy  hand. 
Also  there  was  marked  on  it  Alpha  and  Omega ; 
which  is,  being  interpreted,  the  beginning  and  the 
end ;  even  as  thou  keptest  school  here  and 
stayedst  here  in  the  beginning  of  thy  life,  so  shall 
the  days  of  thy  life  end  here  also,  with  thee  set 
and  established  in  highest  authority.' 

'Peace,  peace,  my  priest,'  said  Laurence, 
1  for  now  I  am  so  beset  and  come  so  low, 
that  my  adversaries  may  well  think  that  I  shall 
never  become  one  high  in  honour  :  and  so  to 
some  other  man  must  this  dream  belong.' 

Then  Laurence  went  west  over  Vatn  Pass, 
where  Gudmund  was  consecrated  abbot  at 
Thingeyri  into  the  benefice  of  Hoskuld  his 
mother's  brother.  Laurence  came  there,  and 
asked  to  teach  the  friars  or  clergy.  But  Abbot 
Gudmund  durst  not  then  receive  him ;  for  it  was 
reported  to  have  been  said  by  Bishop  Jorund  that 
he  did  not  wish  Laurence  to  be  in  the  north 
country  in  H61ar  See.  Thence  he  went  to  his 
friend,  Sir  Haflidi  Steinsson,  at  Breidab61stad 
in  Vestrh6p.     Sir   Haflidi  went  out   to  meet  Sir 


ch.  28-29.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  55 

Laurence  and  received  him  with  open  arms,  and 
had  hangings  put  in  his  room,  and  seated  him 
next  himself,  and  treated  him  as  handsomely  as  a 
bishop.  Then  Sir  Haflidi's  men  asked  why  he 
made  so  much  of  this  fellow  Laurence,  considering 
the  deep  disfavour  he  was  in  with  Bishop  Jorund. 

Then  answered  Sir  Haflidi,  so  loud  that  all  heard, 
'My  sons,  and  many  else,  are  to  bear  in  mind 
that  this  hook-nose  who  sits  by  me,  Laurence,  on 
whom  all  men  look  down,  shall  be  bishop  at 
H61ar.' 

In  many  ways  Sir  Haflidi  was  a  prophet. 
Thence  Laurence  went  south  over  the  country. 
Abbot  Thorlak  asked  him  east  to  Ver,  to  teach 
there.  He  accepted,  and  was  there 
twelve  months;  keeping  school  and  1309-1310 
teaching  many  clergy  and  brethren. 
There  he  taught  a  poor  scholar,  whom  Abbot 
Thorlak  was  helping,  called  Run61f.  Sir  Haflidi 
gave  him  a  school  nickname,  saying  that  he  was 
to  be  called  ■  Grandam ' ;  and  so  thenceforth  he 
was.  Afterwards  he  was  to  the  fore  and  a  good 
scholar. 

29.  In  that  year  it  befell  that  Arni  Helgason  came  with 
much  authority,  given  him  by  King  Hakon,  and  church 
timber  withal,  wherewith  the  church  was  to  be  built  in 
Skalholt.  Then  came  out  the  Pope's  bull  about  the 
Jerusalem  gift.  Then  was  the  slaying  in  battle  of 
Charlemagne,  and  Thorstein,  and  of  Orm.  Much  small- 
pox overran  all  Iceland,  and  many  young  men  died. 
Next  year  it  befell  that  there  was  an  ecclesiastical  council 
at  Vienne  in  France. 

That  next  year  Laurence  was  at  Ver  in  Thyk- 


56  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  29. 

kvabaer,  and  taught  there :  but  then  came  news 
south  from  H61ar  that  the  Chapter  were 
1311  ill  pleased  at  Laurence'  welcome,  and 
thought  it  beseemed  him  to  stay  under 
penance.  Then  Abbot  Thorlak  dared  not  keep 
him.  Then  Hall  Sigurdsson  asked  him  to  Dal 
under  Eyja  Fell.  Sigurd  ' Seal-tar'  his  father 
and  Laurence  had  been  good  friends  of  old  in 
Eyja  Firth.  Then  Laurence  went  to  Hall  in  Dal ; 
he  stayed  winter  there,  but  in  spring  he  was 
minded  to  depart  thence,  for  his  and  Hall's  way 
of  life  were  not  the  same.  Then  Laurence  was 
sore  concerned  where  he  should  betake  himself. 
And  one  morning  in  spring,  as  Laurence  lay  in 
his  bed  he  was  pondering  deeply,  chiefly  about 
where  he  should  settle  or  go  for  help.  Then  a 
light  slumber  seemed  to  glide  upon  him,  and  a 
man  to  come  into  the  lodging  where  he  lay,  clad 
as  a  clerk,  and  to  come  forward  to  the  bed 
wherein  he  lay,  and  to  speak  thus  : 

'Truly  thou  art  sore  straitened  and  in  need; 
but  I  give  thee  counsel,  which  if  thou  keepest, 
there  shall  be  a  turn  for  the  better  in  thy 
fortunes.  Read  daily  the  Hours  of  the  Holy 
Spirit,  and  forget  it  not;  and  the  compassion 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  shall  comfort  thee,  and 
loose  thy  toil  and  trouble.' 

And  when  this  man  had  thus  spoken,  he  went 
away  from  him.  Laurence  had  no  chance  of 
asking  aught,  or  who  he  was ;  for  swiftly  it  passed 
by  him,  and  swiftly  he  woke.  He  gave  God 
thanks   for  the  vision,  and   began   to  keep   the 


ch.  29-30.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  57 

Hours,  and  kept  ever  after  to  these  Hours  till  the 
day  of  his  death.  A  few  nights  after  this  came  a 
letter  to  Laurence  from  the  northern  quarter, 
from  Abbot  Th6rir  of  Miinka-Thvera,  asking 
Laurence  north  to  see  him,  to  teach  the  brethren 
and  clergy  there,  for  twelve  months  at  first ;  and 
for  this  he  had  Bishop  Jorund's  leave.  Then 
Laurence  managed  to  get  north,  and  came  to 
Miinka-Thvera,  as  we  said,  and  Abbot  Th6rir 
and  the  brethren  took  kindly  to  him,  and  there  he 
taught  clergy  and  brethren. 

30.  In  the   summer  the   events   were : — Lord 
Christopher  went  abroad,  also  Lord  Ivarr  '  h61m\ 
Queen  Euphemia  died.   Our  Lord  Pope's 
missives  came  to  Norway.  That  year  died      1312 
Lord    Th6rd    and   Lord    Lopt.       The 
winter  after   died  the   worshipful   Lord   Jorund, 
bishop  at  H61ar,  on  St.   Bridget's  Day;  he  had 
then   been   bishop  forty-six  years.      He 
set  up  two  monasteries,  at  Modruvellir      l^*' 
and  at  Stad  in  Reynisnes.     He  had  the 
church  at  H61ar  built  up,  and  decked  it  with  bells 
and  furniture,  and  enriched  the  foundation  with 
lands   and  goods,   gold   and  refined   silver,   and 
other    fair    treasures,   which   shall    be    seen   till 
Iceland  is  dwelt  in  no  more.     It  is  not   to  be 
forgotten   what   happened  when   Laurence  heard 
that  Bishop  Jorund  was  dead  and  gone.     He  was 
there  in  the   monks'   room  at  Thvera,   when  all 
the   bells  were  rung   for  a   requiem.      When   a 
message  of  the  news  came  from  H61ar,  Laurence, 
like  the  rest,   started   up  hastily,  and  with   the 


58  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  30. 

speed  of  his  uprising  he  got  the  ailment  which 
never  left  him  till  his  dying  day ;  it  was  an  injury 
in  the  small  guts  :  this  he  himself  testified  unto  a 
man  whom  he  trusted.17  Lord  Bishop  Jorund  ere 
he  died,  appointed  to  Sir  Thorstein  Illugason, 
called  '  Notchstone,'  the  officialty  of  the  church  of 
H61ar.  But  Sir  Kodran  Hranason  of  Grenjadar- 
stad  claimed  to  be  Bishop  Jorund's  coadjutor, 
being  appointed  so  by  Archbishop  Eilif.  And 
whereas  Sir  Kodran  had  more  backing,  and  most 
people  were  minded  to  speak  and  do  according 
to  his  will,  he  took  all  authority  in  spiritual  things 
in  H61ar  See.  Laurence  was  at  Miinka-Thvera 
through  the  winter,  and  many  prospered  greatly 
under  his  teaching.  Next  spring  came  Sir  Kodran 
to  Munka-Thvera,  where  he  was  greeted  like  a 
bishop.  Next  day  Sir  Kodran  called  unto  him 
many  learned  men,  and  showed  them  the  letters 
which  the  archbishop  had  given  out  to  him, 
making  him  coadjutor  of  Bishop  Jorund  when 
he  was  declared  incapable  and  worn  with  age. 
But  this  declaration  had  been  false,  because  as 
far  as  capacity  or  infirmity  went,  Bishop  Jorund, 
old  as  he  was  if  reckoned  by  years,  was  well  able 
to  keep  all  his  authority.  And  after  the  reading 
out  of  the  letter — Sir  Kodran  had  it  read  out — 
he  reeled  off  a  long  speech,  asking  what  people 
thought;  which  of  them  had  the  right  to  be 
Official, — Sir  Thorstein,  whom  Bishop  Jorund  had 
appointed,  or  he;  he  himself,  he  thought,  was 
the  better  man  because  of  the  letters  the  arch- 
bishop had  given  him.     Straightway  all  leapt  up 


ch.  30.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  59 

with  one  voice  saying,  that  his  was  the  greater 
authority,  because  of  what  he  had  from  the 
archbishop ;  while  Sir  Thorstein  only  had  the 
word  of  Bishop  Jorund.  Sir  Laurence  was  in 
there,  sitting  outermost  of  the  priests. 

Then  said  Sir  Kodran,  -'How  thinkest  thou, 
Laurence  ?  Thou  knowest  well  the  Canon  Law  ; 
tell  us  what  the  law  seems  to  thee  to  say :  which 
of  us  two,  Sir  Thorstein  or  I,  has  the  right  to  be 
Official  in  the  church  of  H61ar  as  things  stand  ? ' 

Sir  Laurence  answered,  '  Sir  Kodran,  why  ask 
you  such  a  thing  ?  Nay,  go  home  to  H61ar,  and 
let  the  Canon  Law-books  tell  you ;  for  their  plain 
pronouncement  is  this  : — to  me  the  case  is  clear 
that  you,  Sir  Kodran,  were  appointed  by  the 
archbishop  to  be  coadjutor  of  Bishop  Jorund, 
since  he  was  worn  with  age — wThile  he  lived ; 
but  when  he  departed  from  this  world,  there 
in  this  world  was  an  end  of  his  authority;  like- 
wise, by  the  death  of  the  bishop,  your  authority 
is  also  dead  and  done  with.  But  inasmuch  as 
he  had  his  sound  senses,  when  he  appointed 
to  Sir  Thorstein  the  officialty  and  authority 
in  spiritual  things  over  H61ar  bishopric,  there- 
fore my  decision  is,  that  that  appointment  has 
a  right  to  stand,  which  he  made  in  his  last 
days.' 

At  this  speech  of  Laurence  Sir  Kodran  so 
chafed  and  raged,  that  he  said  thus,  openly, 
1  Get  thee  out,  foul  forger !  Thou  shalt  not  be 
judge  here  ! ' 

'I  can  do  this,'  said  Laurence,   'I  can  leave 


60  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  30-31. 

your  presence ;  but  the  way  to  adjudicate  between 
honourable  priests,  is  the  way  I  declare  in  this 
case.' 

Such  also  was  the  archbishop's  decision,  when 
he  heard  that  Sir  Thorstein  and  not  Sir  Kodran 
had  the  right  to  the  officialty.  Sir  Laurence 
might  never  come  into  Sir  Kodran's  sight  while 
he  was  at  Munka-Thvera ;  and  so  he  asked 
Abbot  Thorir  to  let  him  depart  thence.  Then 
Sir  Laurence  went  west  to  Thingeyri,  and 
joyfully  Lord  Abbot  Gudmund  welcomed  him. 
He  set  up  school  there,  and  there  taught 
Abbot  Gudmund  and  many  others.  There 
was  a  deacon  there,  called  Egil,  son  of  Ejy61f 
the  goldsmith  and  Thorgerd  daughter  of  Egil  ; 
on  this  man  Laurence  spent  all  his  pains  in 
teaching  him  Latin;  the  man  knew  well  how 
to  turn  it  into  profit,  and  became  a  ripe  scholar 
and  fine  versifier.  Many  others  Laurence  taught, 
of  whom  these  got  on  best :  Th6rd  son  of 
speaker  Gudmund;  a  poor  lad  named  6laf 
Hjaltason;  he  taught  him  to  be  a  good 
scholar,  and  he  was  afterwards  schoolmaster  at 
Holar.  Sir  Haflidi  at  Breidab61stad  also  put 
under  him  his  son,  named  Einar,17  then  ten  years 
old.  Sir  Haflidi  went  thence  to  Holar,  when 
Bishop  Audun  came  to  Iceland,  and  stayed  with 
his  daughter's  son  at  H61ar  while  Audun  was 
bishop;  for  Sir  Haflidi  and  Bishop  Audun  were 
the  fastest  of  friends. 

31.  Now  to  tell  how  in  the  next  summer  after 
Lord   Bishop    Jorund    departed,    Sir    Thorstein 


ch.31.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  6i 

Illugason  and  Snjdlf  Sumarlidason  went  abroad 
with  the  news  of  Bishop  Jorund's  death.  Then 
Audun  the  Red  was  chosen  bishop  of  H61ar ;  he 
was  chief  of  the  Chapter,  and  had  long  been 
treasurer  of  king  Hakon,  and  best  beloved  of  all 
the  canons  by  the  king.  Many  said  that  they 
chose  Audun  bishop  of  H61ar  in  Iceland,  because 
they  thought  they  would  get  no  advancement  from 
the  king  while  Audun  was  by,  as  he  had  the  king's 
ear  most.  He  was  consecrated  bishop 
on  St.  Catherine's  Day.  He  had  long  N°^|5' 
had  the  church  in  the  north  at  Haloga- 
land,  called  the  Church  at  Thrandarnes.  He  was 
a  leading  man,  rich  in  substance.  The  yeoman 
Clement  was  the  husband  of  his  daughter  Olof. 
She  had  before  had  for  husband  Thorstein  a 
yeoman,  whose  sons  by  her  were  Red  Eystein 
and  Red  Thorberg :  and  the  son  of  the  yeoman 
Klemet  and  6lof  was  called  Vigleik. 

In  that  year  there  was  a  wreck  of  the  merchant- 
ship  Uxi  [Ox],  at  Eyri.  Then  arose  a  fray 
between  the  Eastmen  and  Gizur  'Flaw,'  so  that 
they  beat  him.  That  was  a  hard  winter,  in  which 
Bishop  Jorund  departed  :  that  winter  was  called 
the  '  horse-death '  winter.  In  the  next  year,  when 
Bishop  Audun  was  consecrated,  Pope  Clement 
died.  Then  the  Emperor  was  betrayed  on  Easter- 
day  with  this  treason,  that  when  he  had  taken  the 
Lord's  body,  poison  was  put  into  the  chalice 
whereof  he  drank,  and  thus  he  came  by  his  death. 
Then  Sir  Snj61f  and  Sir  Thorstein  came  out  in 
the  summer  with  the  Pope's  ordinance  to  pay  him 


62  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  31-32. 

tithes  of  all  Church  property.  They  were  also 
appointed  by  Lord  Bishop  Audun  officers  over 
all  H61ar  See,  the  lord  bishop  wintering  in 
Norway. 

32.  Next  year,  in   the   summer,  came   Bishop 
Audun  out  to  Iceland,  landing  at  Seleyri.      He 

rode  the  sand  north  to  H61ar,  where  all 
1314     the  chief  priests  were  present.     He  was 

received  at  the  bishop's  place  with  little 
show.  He  was  very  stiff  with  riding,  being  an  old 
man.  Sir  Kodran  and  Sir  Snj61f  did  nothing  but 
mock  him;  scant  heed  he  paid  to  it.  He  had 
beams  brought  north  from  Eyri,  whereof  he  had  a 
timber  hall  built  at  H61ar.  In  autumn  Bishop 
Audun  visited  over  the  western  district,  and  con- 
secrated the  church  at  Thingeyri.  Laurence  was 
there  at  the  time;  Audun  paid  no  heed  to  him 
then,  and  so  of  course  Laurence  gave  himself  little 
pains  for  him.  Many  plaints  were  lodged  before 
Bishop  Audun,  which  were  useless  because  he  did 
not  know  the  ways  of  the  country.  And  when 
he  came  home  from  his  visitation,  he  drove  away 
Skiili  who  was  steward,  and  seized  all  his  goods. 
In  the  winter  arose  great  quarrelling  and  discord 
between  Sir  Kodran  and  Sir  Snj61f  on  the  one 
side,  and  Lord  Bishop  Audun  on  the  other. 
They  were  both  in  league  against  him  and  ap- 
pealed at  first  to  the  archbishop.  Lord  Bishop 
Audun  took  Grenjadarstad  from  Sir  Kodran. 
Snj61f  submitted  to  the  bishop,  and  received  the 
living  of  Grenjadarstad. 

As  soon  as  the  lord  bishop  came  home  from 


ch.  32.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  63 

his  visitation,  he  inquired  where  the  relics  of  the 
good  Bishop  Gudmund  were  like  to  be  \  for  they 
had  been  so  neglected  before,  that  people  knew 
not  where  they  were  likely  to  be.  Digging  was 
first  done  inside  the  choir,  but  they  were  not 
found  there — only  some  other  relics  in  a  coffin, 
just  as  Bishop  Jorund  had  had  them  done  up 
when  he  built  the  new  church.  Then  the  smith, 
Kolli  Helgason,  was  sent  for :  for  long  he  would 
not  come,  being  somewhat  out  with  the  lord 
bishop.  Later,  though,  he  came,  being  more 
admonished  to  it  by  what  was  due  to  Bishop 
Gudmund,  than  by  the  bidding  of  Bishop  Audun. 
Then  said  Kolli,  that  it  was  of  no  avail  to  look  in 
the  choir ;  he  told  them  to  break  up  the  floor  in 
the  nave.  He  marked  the  spot  so  clearly,  that 
the  coffin  was  found  where  he  said,  and  he  opened 
it.  Therein  were  found  the  bishop's  remains,  and 
all  done  up  just  as  Bishop  Jorund  had  told  him. 
A  leg  was  to  be  seen  broken,  with  a  clean  clout 
wrapped  round  it;  on  the  leg  were  huge  knobs, 
as  was  to  be  looked  for  according  as  is  told  in  the 
Life 18  of  Gudmund,  namely  that  he  broke  his  leg 
when  lying  off  Strand,  when  he  was  a  scholar  with 
Ingimund  his  kinsman.  Then  Bishop  Audun 
was  called,  and  he  was  very  glad  thereat,  and 
had  then  a  new  coffin  made,  and  the  relics  of 
blessed  Bishop  Gudmund  put  in  it.  Afterwards 
Lord  Bishop  Audun  had  it  done  up  beautifully 
with  a  grating,  and  had  a  great  cross  put  before  it 
inside  the  church.  Then  straightway  came  a 
great  gathering  to  the  church,  and  many  prayers 


64  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  32. 

were  made  over  all  Iceland,  and  there  were  many 
goodly  miracles.  It  was  a  great  good  chance  for 
Bishop  Audun  that  he  was  the  first  bishop  of 
H61ar  to  take  the  relics  of  the  blessed  Bishop 
Gudmund  out  of  the  ground ;  by  whose  help  his 
renown  and  report  have  waxed  ever  since,  beyond 
all  those  bishops  of  H61ar  that  came  after,  even 
until  now.  Then  straightway,  throughout  the 
days  of  Bishop  Audun,  there  was  a  mighty  holiday 
on  Gudmund's  Day;  the  bishop  himself  sang 
services  and  masses  for  his  soul,  and  honoured 
him  in  all  things  to  the  foremost  of  his  power. 
Lord  Audun  did  this  from  the  goodwill  which 
God  breathed  into  his  breast,  and  somewhat  also 
from  the  prompting  of  king  Hakon  when  he 
parted  with  him.  But  before  Bishop  Audun 
came  there  was  no  remembrance  kept  of  him, 
save  that  a  mass  was  said  for  his  soul,  even  as  for 
the  rest  of  the  bishops  of  H61ar :  but  there  was 
no  holiday,  for  men  knew  not  where  were  his 
relics  and  his  resting-place. 

Till  Bishop  Audun  came  there  was  no  observ- 
ance of  the  day  of  translation  of  holy  Bishop 
John  of  H61ar  :  hours  only  were  chanted,  but  it 
was  not  kept  holiday.  Lord  Bishop  Audun  stopped 
this,  so  that  there  were  orders  over  all  H61ar  See 
to  keep  it  sacred  by  law,  and  to  chant  twice  inside 
the  church.  By  things  like  this  it  could  be  seen 
what  a  mighty  ruler  Bishop  Audun  was.  He  had 
brought  to  Iceland  with  him  a  stone-mason,  and 
south  of  the  church  in  Rafta  Slope  he  found  a 
red  rock,  and  this  he  had  broken   up,  brought 


ch.32.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAK.  65 

home  and  hewn,  and  had  a  stone  oven  made  in 
the  wooden  hall  (as  is  done  in  Norway)  to  carry 
out  the  smoke  while  he  was  sitting  himself  within. 
Also  he  had  the  high  altar  built  of  stone,  and  a 
hollow  therein  with  an  iron  door  before  it,  so  that 
the  treasures  of  the  church  could  be  in  ward  there, 
safe  from  fire  and  everything :  likewise  he  had 
made  all  the  steps  which  are  to  be  seen  in  the 
church,  and  the  pillars  in  the  choir;  and  had 
the  ceiling  painted,  and  the  ceiling  put  over  the 
high  altar,  where  coffins  and  other  rubbish  had 
been  hitherto.  Also  he  contributed  good  furniture 
and  a  fine  cope  called  Skarmande.  He  had  the 
bishop's  lodging  done  up  in  a  fashion  seldom  seen 
in  so  poor  a  country,  and  a  pretty  penny  this  re- 
pairing cost  the  church.  Notable  above  all  was 
his  great  hospitality :  for  though  his  adversaries 
were  contending  with  him,  and  his  servants  an- 
nounced it  was  time  to  go  to  table,  thus  he  spoke 
to  his  foes :  '  Go  to  table  and  to  God's  gifts ; 
be  not  wroth  with  the  meat,  though  ye  be  wroth 
with  me.'  Thus  he  often  prevailed  over  his 
adversaries,  so  that  after  the  merry  and  good  cheer 
which  he  dealt  them,  they  yielded  everything  into 
his  power.  All  his  service  he  went  through  in 
goodly  style.  He  had  a  voice  so  beautiful,  loud, 
and  clear,  that  every  one  was  ravished  to  hear  his 
chanting.  He  was  a  mighty  man  in  prayer,  for 
he  sang  a  third  of  the  Psalms  of  Our  Lady  which 
holy  Archbishop  Anselm  had  writ  in  Latin.  He 
kept  a  water-fast  before  all  the  days  of  the  apostles 
and  St.  Mary's  Days,  and  before  many  bishops' 


66  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  32-33. 

days.  He  kept  all  the  Hours  through  Lent  and 
Advent;  but  not  daily,  save  on  the  highest  of 
high-days. 

33.  On  St.  Gregory's  Day,  the  priests  of  most 

note  in  H61ar  See  assembled  to  H61ar. 
MarIt?I62'  The  bishop  had  the  mass  stopped  when 

it  had  got  as  far  as  the  Gospel ;  for  the 
bishop  accounted  Kodran  excommunicated.  This 
was  accounted  his  offence,  that  he  had  let  the 
brethren  in  Modruvellir  have  authority  in  temporal 
things;  the  bishop  thought  that  they  had 
squandered  a  deal  of  money  since  the  death  of 
Bishop  Jorund,  and  he  wanted  Kodran  to  pay  it 
back  to  the  church  of  H61ar.  Next,  Kodran  had 
taken  on  him  to  do  the  duty  of  the  Official ;  the 
third  offence  he  accounted  to  be  his  conspiracy 
against  himself.  At  this  time  all  the  priests  were 
leagued  in  opposition  to  him,  except  Sir  Haflidi  of 
Breidab(51stad ;  the  bishop  gave  him  good  gifts,  and 
he  parted  on  ill  terms  with  Kodran.  The  good- 
will which  Bishop  Audun  showed  to  the  foremost 
priests  met  with  ill  requital ;  for  he  gave  dispen- 
sations to  their  sons,  having  authority  thereto 
from  the  Pope.  He  gave  dispensation  among  the 
following  : — Einar  Haflidason,  Paul  Thorsteins- 
son,  Thorstein  Hallsson,  Thorm6d  Thorkelsson. 
These  were  the  foremost  men  in  H61ar  See  for 
scholarship  and  success.  He  also  gave  it  to 
John  Kodransson,  who  was  a  leading  man  and 
priest  of  note,  because  of  his  shrewdness  and 
substance. 

In  that  year  John  the  Twenty-second  was  made 


ch.  33-]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAK.  67 

Pope.  Bishop  Ami  went  to  Greenland.  Then 
died  Ingjald  bishop  of  Hamar.  In  the  year 
after  that  in  which  Bishop  Audun  came 
to  Iceland  much  happened.  At  Modru-  1315 
vellir,  in  the  Horg  Valley,  the  convent 
and  church  with  all  the  bells  and  church  furniture 
were  burnt.  The  convent  in  Nidarholm  was  also 
burnt.  Then  Lord  Bishop  Audun  also  took  the 
abbey  away  from  Abbot  Th6rir,  at  Munka-Thvera. 
Then  also  arose  a  disagreement  between  Bishop 
Audun  and  Gudmund  abbot  at  Thingeyri.  The 
beginning  thereof  was,  that  Eyjolf,  a  yeoman  in 
Forsaela-dale,  told  Bishop  Audun  that  the  alms 
which  Karl  the  rich  had  given,  being  worth  seven 
hundred  and  twenty  ells  of  wool,  which  ought  to 
be  at  Breidab61stad,  in  Vestrh6p,  and  which  he 
had  given  for  distribution  among  the  paupers  to 
whom  the  alms  were  due,  had  been  taken  off 
by  Thorstein  Hjalmsson,  when  he  went  from 
Breidabolstad  to  Thingeyri ;  and  that  these  seven 
hundred  and  twenty  ells  had  never  come  back  to 
Breidab61stad.  Lord  JBishop  Audun  bade  Sir 
Haflidi  claim  back  these  alms  for  the  church  at 
Breidab61stad.  Sir  Haflidi  was  loath  unto  this,  for 
he  was  prebendary  at  Thingeyri  and  loved  the 
church  there  well ;  still  he  did  the  bishop's  bidding. 
And  upon  witness  and  inquiry  made,  the  bishop 
decided  that  the  property  which  Karl  the  rich  had 
given  at  the  first  should  be  restored.  Secondly, 
Abbot  Gudmund  and  the  brethren  laid  a  complaint 
against  the  church  of  H61ar  about  the  bishop's 
tithes :.  namely,  that  John,  first  bishop  of  H61ar, 


68  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  33. 

had  given  all  the  bishop's  tithes,  west  of  Vatn- 
dale  river,  to  Thingeyri  Convent  when  he  founded 
it,  to  help  it.  For  this  reason  Abbot  Gudmund 
appealed  to  the  archbishop.  Sir  Laurence  com- 
posed this  appeal  in  Latin,  and  sided  with  the 
abbot  in  all  his  doings. 

This  same  year  at  the  beginning  of  Lent, 
Laurence  and  his  son  Ami  took  monk's  vows  ; 

Ami  had  come  to  his  father  two  years 
1317      since,   and   Laurence  had   him   taught. 

In  Lent  Laurence  was  consecrated  monk, 
as  well  as  Ami  his  son,  by  Abbot  Gudmund. 
Then  also  Berg  Sokkason  joined  the  brother- 
hood. Laurence  had  known  him  of  old  at  Miinka- 
Thvera,  when  he  set  himself  to  learn  of  Laurence  : 
he  was  the  most  accomplished  scholar,  a  splendid 
chanter,  and  a  great  orator ;  so  that  he  composed 
many  histories  of  the  saints  very  eloquently  in 
Northern  speech.  Brother  Berg  and  Laurence 
loved  one  another  with  the  love  of  their  hearts ; 
for  all  whom  he  saw  were  willing  to  learn  good, 
and  use  their  learning  for  good,  Laurence  loved. 

Brother  Laurence  observed  well  the  rules  of 
St.  Benedict,  under  whom  he  had  vowed  him- 
self, so  as  to  be  an  ensample  for  many.  He  was 
not  much  for  gadding  abroad,  for  he  never  left  his 
cloister  unless  he  was  bidden  by  his  superior,  or 
for  strong  urgency.  The  times  of  silence  he  kept 
carefully  :  then,  just  as  in  the  night  when  it  was 
1  utmost  silence,'  he  never  said  a  word,  either  in 
Latin  or  Northern  speech ;  and  between  these  times 
he  spoke  mostly  Latin,  as  in  church  and  congrega- 


ch.  33-34.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  69 

tion.  Lowly  and  obedient  he  was  to  his  superior  j 
he  would  never  sit  down  anywhere  but  in  the  con- 
gregation j  though  the  abbot  asked  him,  he  would 
excuse  himself,  and  beg  that  the  other  monks 
should  sit.  His  sole  business  was  to  read,  teach, 
and  study  books.  He  bestowed  all  pains,  teaching 
Arni  Latin  and  handwriting  j  the  lad  became  a 
most  accomplished  scholar,  and  wrote  very  finely, 
and  was  a  versifier.  It  could  be  truly  said  that  a 
convent  that  was  made  up  of  such  monks  as  were 
then  at  Thingeyri,  was  a  fine  one. 

34.  Egil  Eyjulfsson,  deacon,  was  in  this  year 
named  above  consecrated  priest  by  Bishop  Audun, 
and  then  he  was  first  appointed  schoolmaster  at 
H61ar.  Their  parting  seemed  a  mighty  matter  to 
Laurence,  for  he  had  formed  the  lovingest  regard 
for  him.  In  the  summer  Gudmund,  abbot  at 
Thingeyri,  went  abroad,  and  stayed  abroad  two 
years.  The  archbishop  did  nothing  about  his  suit 
with  Bishop  Audun,  not  wishing  to  do  aught  till 
Audun  came  to  answer  for  himself.  In  autumn 
Bishop  Audun  visited  over  the  Western  district. 
And  as  he  rode  from  Breidab61stad  to  Thingeyri, 
the  brethren  barred  the  convent  in  the  face  of 
Bishop  Audun,  and  made  no  procession  to  meet 
him.  Meat  was  prepared  for  his  people,  and  also 
for  himself,  but  no  ale.  Sir  Haflidi  had  his  own 
ale  brought  out,  and  Audun  and  his  people  drank 
this.  Brother  Bjorn  Thorsteinsson  was  prior  over 
the  convent  and  establishment.  Many  yeomen 
had  come  down  over  Vatn-dale  to  defend  the 
convent  from  the  bishop,  if  he  thought  of  assaulting 


70  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  34. 

it ;  but  little  liking  showed  he  or  any  of  his  men 
for  doing  so. 

Next  year  it  came  to  pass  that  King  Hakon  Mag- 
nusson,  king  of  Norway,  died.  In  Sweden  also  it  befell 
1319  that  King  Birgir  starved  in  prison  his  two  brothers, 
Duke  Eir/k  the  long  and  Valdimar  :  the  wife  of  Eirfk 
was  Ingibjorg,  the  daughter  of  King  Hakon  ;  she  was 
aftn  wards  Culed  the  duchess.  In  the  same  year  died 
Sir  Haflidi  of  Breidabdlstad,  a  man  of  mark,  sometime 
chaplain  of  King  Eirek,  and  afterwards  for  long  steward 
at  H61ar  and  Thingeyri.  Then  died  Sir  Kodran 
Ranason  in  Norway. 

Sir  Egil  had  leave  of  Lord  Bishop  Audun,  and 
had  thought  to  go  to  Norway  in  the  ship  that 
was  at  Seleyri,  in  which  same  ship  Sir  Grfm 
( )\\  igsson  was  to  have  gone  with  business  of  Lord 
Hishop  Audun  ;  but  that  ship  was  weather-beaten 
back.  Sir  Egil  was  now  still  at  H61ar,  and  the 
bishop  took  him  utterly  into  his  love.  Then 
in  the  summer  came  a  writ  summoning  out  both 
bishops  of  Iceland,  both  lawmen,  Lord  Ketil 
Thorkelsson,  six  officers  of  the  king,  and  six  of  the 
chief  yeomen.  Lord  Grfm  Thorstein  took  the 
jurisdiction,  and  Erlend  the  yeoman  from  Upsir 
in    Svarfadar-dale   had   the  jurisdiction  over   the 

Northern  quarter.  Then  was  destroyed 
Dec.  23    the   church   in  Skalholt   in  winter,  just 

before  Thorlak's  Day.  Magmis  Eireks- 
son,  son  of  King  Hakon's  daughter,  was  chosen 
king  over  Norway,  Sweden,  and  Gotland.  Lord 
Erlend  Vidkunnsson  was  Regent  over  all  the 
kingdom  of  Norway,  Lord  Archbishop  Eilff  and 
all  the  mightiest  lords  in  Norway  consenting,  King 


ch.  34-35-]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  71 

Magmis  being  three  years  old.  Next  summer 
Lord  Bishop  Audun  made  ready  to  journey  abroad 
from  Gaseyri,  was  driven  back,  and  landed  at 
Hdsavfk,  Sir  Egil  being  then  still  with  him.  He 
stayed  the  winter  at  home  at  H61ar. 

35.  In  autumn  Sir  Egil  was  mediator  to  re- 
concile Bishop  Audun  and  brother  Laurence, 
putting  it  clearly  before  the  bishop  that  a  man  like 
Laurence  was  a  tower  of  strength  to  him.  Bishop 
Audun  sent  Sir  Egil  west  to  Thingeyri,  and  brother 
Laurence  rode  to  H61ar  with  him ;  and  they  met, 
and  the  bishop  received  him  worthily,  granting 
him  his  friendship;  whereunto  brother  Laurence 
granted  his  obedience  in  return ;  and  was  to  teach 
the  son  of  the  lord  bishop's  daughter,  named 
Eystein.  This  youth  went  with  brother  Laurence, 
who  taught  him  ;  and  he  afterwards  became  a 
man  of  mark,  and  for  a  long  time  had  St.  Mary's 
Church  in  Throndhjem,  and  was  called  Eystein 
the  '  Red.'  Through  the  winter  and  spring  there 
was  disquiet  in  H61ar  See;  for,  because  of  the 
slanders  of  wicked  men,  it  was  said  against  Bishop 
Audun  that  the  tithe  would  have  to  be  paid  by 
property  assessed  at  a  hundred  and  twenty  ells 19 
and  upwards.  The  vagabonds  would  not  brook 
this,  and  banded  together  over  Skaga  Firth,  and 
d  a  gang.  They  laid  wait  for  the  bishop  in 
H6fdah61ar,  and  there  was  a  danger  that  they 
might  have  taken  him  and  laid  hands  upon  him, 
if  Ram  J6nsson  from  Glaumbaer  and  many  priests 
had  not  yielded  the  promise  that  thenceforth  the 
tithes  should  be  imposed  and  arranged  as  of  old, 


72  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  35. 

and  that  the  paupers  should  not  receive  a  share 
from  property  worth  less  than  six  hundred  ells. 

In  the  winter  people  fared  very  hard ;  far  and 
wide  was  the  deep-sea  ice,  and  the  weather  was 
very  bitter.  In  the  spring  Lord  Bishop  Audun 
set  his  face  against  the  vow  that  had  been  made 
on  Easter-day  to  the  sainted  John  bishop  of 
Holar,  namely,  that  every  yeoman  in  Skaga 
Firth  between  the  lava-fields  who  was  liable  to 
dues,  should  give  a  clipped  sheepskin,  where- 
with to  buy  a  graven  image,  to  be  made  for  the 
sainted  John  bishop  of  Holar;  this  the  yeoman 
Ram  J6nsson  had  to  prevent  being  done.  The 
weather  took  a  turn  for  the  better  in  this  way  : — 
On  Easter-day,  before  high  mass,  when  the  shrine 
was  brought  out,  the  north  wind  straightway 
dropped  dead ;  and  after  high  mass  it  arose  from 
the  south,  and  in  evening,  at  evensong  a  thaw 
came  and  kept  up  till  the  ice  and  snow  were  all 
gone.  And  through  the  spring  there  was  good 
grass,  and  the  sea-ice  drifted  away.  Also  there 
was  contention  between  Bishop  Audun  and  Sir 
Snj61f,  from  whom  he  took  Grenjadarstad,  the 
charge  being  that  he  would  not  take  the  clerk 
whom  the  bishop  ordained  to  that  place.  The 
bishop  exacted  an  oath  that  seven  clerks  should 
be  bound  to  be  kept  at  Grenjadarstad.  Many 
other  charges  the  bishop  had  against  Snjdlf ;  the 
end  was  that  the  bishop  laid  on  him  the  utter- 
most ban,  depriving  him  of  all  communion  with 
Christian  men.  Snjolf  heeded  this  not  a  whit,  but 
went  to  Norway. 


ch.  35-36.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  73 

Ami,  bishop  of  Skalholt,  had  sailed  in  the 
summer  before  to  Norway,  and  died  in  Norway  in 
the  winter.  Orm  Thorsteinsson  was 
bishop-elect  of  Skalholt.  In  the  spring  1320 
just  spoken  of,  the  ship  Shdk  [Chess] 
touched  East  Firth  and  broke  on  the  ice.  Abbot 
Th6rd  and  Berg  J6nsson  were  on  board,  and  all 
hands  reached  land  sorely  distressed.  The  aforesaid 
Berg  was  on  his  way  with  letters  to  Bishop  Audun. 
Straightway  the  bishop  made  Berg  start  off  and 
sent  him  south  to  Eyri  to  take  ship  there,  and  this 
was  done.  In  summer,  at  the  moot,  the  laymen 
from  the  Northern  quarter  leagued  in  the  resolve 
to  suffer  no  innovation  at  the  hand  of  Bishop 
Audun.  After  the  moot  Lord  Grim  and  many 
men  of  mark  rode  to  H61ar  and  parleyed  with 
Bishop  Audun ;  the  bishop  was  not  softened  at 
their  words,  and  they  against  whom  he  had  plaints 
before  submitted  unto  him  j  and  thus  they  parted. 

36.  In  summer  Bishop  Audun  made  ready  and 
departed  from  H61ar  with  his  company,  and  Sir 
Egil  went  with  him.  Sir  Thorstein  Illugason  he 
left  for  his  Official.  In  the  same  ship  was  also 
Orm,  bishop-elect  of  Skalholt.  They  put  to  sea, 
and  had  a  fair  voyage,  and  reached  Norway.  Lord 
Bishop  Audun  went  north  to  Throndhjem,  and 
there  met  Archbishop  Eih'f,  who  received  him 
kindly;  there  he  wintered.  Now  it  is  to  be  re- 
corded that  Lord  Ketil  Thorlaksson  came  to  Ice- 
land with  writs  from  the  king.  The  land  was  then 
sworn  in  to  King  Magnus.  Then  came  to 
Norway  Lord  Gudmund,  abbot  from  Thingeyri, 


74  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  36. 

and   Sir    John   K6dransson,  who   was  at  H61ar 
through  the  winter  and  kept  school  there. 

Lord  Bishop  Audun  abode  in  Throndhjem  and 
feasted  deep  at  Yule ;  not  till  far  past  Yule  was  it 
over.  At  his  banquet  also  the  archbishop  stayed 
some  days  ;  but  the  canons  continually.  Early  in 
Yule  Lord  Audun  took  gout ;  first  it  came  on  the 
leg  at  the  knee,  and  then  the  pain  struck  up  into 
the  body.  Leeches  were  called,  all  counsel  sought, 
and  it  grew  worse  and  worse.  So  stout  a  fellow 
was  he,  that  he  sat  up  with  his  mates,  making 
them  as  merry  as  though  he  had  not  a  pang.  And 
when  he  saw  how  it  would  be  with  him,  he  called 
the  archbishop  and  all  the  chief  men,  bidding 
them  to  his  banquet  still.  And,  after  the  pledg- 
ing of  Mary,20  he  spoke  nobly,  and  thanked  God 
and  Mary  his  sweet  mother  for  all  the  rich  estate 
and  fair  fortune  which  God  had  given  to  him,  so 
unworthy  of  this  world ;  begging  all  men  nigh  him 
there  to  forgive  him  and  pray  God  for  him,  and 
saying  out  that  within  a  few  days  he  would  go 
forth  from  the  world.  First  he  gave  to  the  arch- 
bishop, to  the  canons,  and  to  all  the  foremost  men 
who  had  gathered  there  to  banquet,  the  goodliest 
gifts;  entreating  them  also,  that  three  nights 
thence,  however  it  went  with  his  life,  they  should 
hold  like  feast  and  revel.  Then  all  took  leave  of 
him,  and  he  went  away  leaning  on  somebody. 
Then  he  took  to  his  bed  and  made  all  his  disposi- 
tions, choosing  to  rest  in  St.  Mary's  Church  there 
in  the  town,  seeing  that  he  might  not  lie  in  that 
Mary's  Church  where   he  was   bishop,   at  H61ar 


ch.  36.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  75 

in  Iceland.  And  after  he  was  anointed,  the  arch- 
bishop came  to  him  and  asked  him  who  in  Ice- 
land was  fitted  best  to  be  bishop  at  H61ar,  when 
he  was  gone. 

Then  Bishop  Audun  answered,  '  In  H61ar  See 
there  are  many  fine  clergy ;  but  before  God  I  will 
answer  for  this,  that  no  man  seems  to  us  better 
fitted  to  be  bishop  than  brother  Laurence  at 
Thingeyri.  This  can  we  make  good  for  many 
reasons.  And  first,  because  he  has  given  himself  to 
God,  and  served  well  and  devoutly  under  the  holy 
rule  of  St.  Benedict ;  this  was  told  us  for  truth 
when  we  were  in  Iceland.  Further,  he  is  the  best 
scholar,  and  well  skilled  in  Canon  Law.  Also  he 
is  bold  and  trusty  in  all  business  that  concerns 
law-suits ;  and  he  would  never  let  the  rights  which 
belong  to  Holy  Church  be  wrested  from  her  hand  ; 
for  the  men  of  North  Iceland  need  this — to  have 
a  bishop  over  them  who  is  both  a  great  scholar 
and  a  firm  enough  hand  to  chastise  all  the 
perverseness  and  disobedience  in  that  place.' 

'Thou  knewest,'  the  archbishop  said,  'how  he 
withstood  us  both,  when  he  was  with  Archbishop 
Jorund,  and  read  the  writ  of  ban  upon  us  twain.' 

Lord  Audun  replied,  '  Doth  not  the  need  of 
Holy  Church  that  men  like  this  should  be  chosen 
to  be  governors  and  bishops,  count  to  thee  for 
more  than  certain  offences  done  against  us  ?  this 
also  is  most  right  and  becoming  before  God,  that 
if  in  this  and  that  we  have  transgressed  against 
him,  we  should  hereby  redress  it.  Laurence  is  not 
guilty  for  doing  his  master's  bidding.' 


76  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE         [ch.  36-37. 

So  heartily  did  Audun  speak  about  this  matter, 

that  he  wept ;  and  all  that  were  there  praised  his 

speaking.    And  when  Bishop  Audun  had 

I3221'  received  all  God's  sacrament,  he  died,  on 
the  second  day  of  St.  Agnes,  with  great 
glory  and  high  report ;  and  his  resting-place  is  in  St. 
Mary's  Church  in  Throndhjem.  His  departure  was 
observed  with  the  utmost  honour  and  worship. 
His  heirs  increased  the  banquet  which  he  had  kept 
up  in  his  lifetime,  and  bade  guests  afresh,  and  turned 
it  into  a  funeral  feast.  It  has  been  the  common 
speech  of  men,  that  no  man  of  all  the  Norse 
bishops  was  ever  such  a  prince  in  Iceland  in  all 
manner  of  magnificence,  as  Bishop  Audun. 

37.  Now  to  tell  how  after  a  little  while  had  gone 
by,  the  Archbishop  summoned  the  Chapter,  and 
dealt  with  them  about  the  choice  of  a  bishop  to 
the  church  of  H61ar.  Archbishop  Eilif  would  have 
nothing  but  the  choice  of  brother  Laurence  for 
bishop  Holar,  even  as  Bishop  Audun  had  pointed 
out.  By  God's  will  it  was  so  decided,  that  Arch- 
bishop Eilif  chose  and  elected  brother  Laurence 
bishop  at  H61ar,  all  the  canons  consenting.  This 
election  was  published  in  the  chancel,  Christ 
Church,  in  Nidar6s,  a  Te  Deum  being  first 
chanted,  and  bells  rung. 

Before  this  it  befell  that  Orm  Thorsteinsson, 
bishop-elect  to  Skalholt,  died  ere  he  was  conse- 
crated. Then  Orm  Steinsson  was  chosen  bishop 
in  Skalholt,  and  was  loath  to  be ;  and  so  he  made 
his  pilgrimage  to  the  threshold  of  the  apostles 
Peter  and  Paul,  and  died  soon  after.     After  this 


ch.  37.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  77 

'Skiff'  Grim  was  chosen,  who  before  that  was 
abbot  at  H61m  in  Nidar6s.  He  was  consecrated 
bishop  in  Skalholt,  and  was  bishop  three  months, 
and  spent  thirty-six  thousand  ells  value,  the  pro- 
perty of  the  church  in  Skalholt ;  he  died  in  Hogn, 
when  the  traders  were  lying  by  for  a  wind.  After 
that  Bishop  John  Halld6rsson  was  chosen  and 
consecrated  to  Skalholt ;  he  was  of  the  Dominican 
Order,  a  great  scholar,  and  noble  preacher  j  he  had 
been  long  abroad  studying  in  Bologna  and  at  Paris 
in  France.  While  this  was  passing  in  Norway, 
people  in  Iceland  were  unaware  of  how  things  had 
gone  there.  At  the  moot,  a  ship,  driven  back, 
came  to  Eyri.  Among  people  of  note  therein  was 
the  Lady  Malfrid.  Only  then  did  it  get  abroad 
that  bishops  were  chosen  for  Iceland ;  Bishop  John 
to  Skalholt,  and  brother  Laurence  to  H61ar. 
People  could  not  think  who  this  Laurence  could 
be,  not  believing  at  first  that  brother  Laurence 
from  Thingeyri  could  be  elected. 

Now  it  must  be  told  how  this  summer,  a  little 
after  the  moot,  it  came  to  pass,  that  Abbot  Gud- 
mund  from  Thingeyri  was  asked  by  the 
Lady    Gudrun,   daughter    of  Thorstein,      1322 
then  dwelling  at  Holtastad  in  Langdale, 
to  a  friendly  feast ;   and   with  Abbot  Gudmund 
went  the  two  brethren,  brother  Bjorn  and  brother 
Laurence.     And   when  he  and  they  were   riding 
home,  and  had  passed  over  Blanda,  a  man  named 
Thorvard,   and   nicknamed  '  Bishop,'  met  them ; 
he  told  them  of  the  arrival  of  Bishop  Audun's  ship, 
and  of  his  death.     Abbot  Gudmund  asked  what 


78  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  37. 

people  said  about  who  was  chosen  bishop  to  H61ar. 
Thorvard  said  that  he  was  called  Laurence.  Now 
they  had  not  yet  heard  of  the  ship's  arrival  or  the 
news.  And  when  the  man  had  left  them,  brother 
Bjorn  said  to  Laurence,  '  Brother  Laurence,  wilt 
not  thou  be  the  bishop-elect  ? ' 

He  answered,  'Flout  me  not;  it  seems  to  me 
likelier  that  the  canons  in  Norway  have  so 
plucked  me  down  from  my  degree,  as'many  know, 
that  I  have  not  the  least  hope  of  their  ordaining 
authority  unto  me.' 

And  when  they  came  home  to  Thingeyri,  within 
two  days  after  that,  a  letter  came  from  the  Lady 
Malfrfd  to  brother  Laurence,  saying  that  she  had 
been  there  in  Christ  Church  in  Norway,  that  he 
was  elected  bishop  at  H61ar,  and  that  this  had 
been  published  in  the  chancel.  He  could  not 
now  hide  from  himself  the  truth  of  the  stories  that 
tallied.  He  was  deeply  moved  about  this  matter, 
thanking  God  and  his  sweet  mother  Mary  for  all 
the  gifts  vouchsafed  unto  him.  He  kept  his  seat 
in  the  choir  and  cloister.     In  summer  on 

Aug.  3  the  latter  St.  6laf  s  Day,  Sir  Egil 
Eyjdlfsson  came  with  the  archbishop's 
decree;  he  had  entered  the  country  a  few  days 
before  on  the  ship  that  put  in  at  Gaseyri.  The 
decree  was  in  this  wise,  there  were  two  letters 
with  hanging  seals,  and  this  was  their  tenor :  one 
said  that  the  archbishop  remitted  to  him  all  the 
offences  which  he  had  done  against  the  church  of 
Nidar6s,  the  Archbishop  and  the  Chapter ;  giving 
this  reason,  to  which  the  Canon  Law  testifies,  that 


ch.  37-38-1  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  79 

the  entering  of  a  cloister  is  like  any  other  baptism, 
and  so  all  that  a  man  has  done  against  God's  laws 
is  remitted  to  him  as  soon  as  he  goes  under  the 
holy  order.  The  sense  of  the  other  letter  was, 
that  the  archbishop,  with  the  counsel  and  enact- 
ment of  all  the  canons,  elected  brother  Laurence 
bishop  at  H61ar,  with  all  the  state  and  glory  which 
befits  the  rank  and  honour  of  a  bishop ;  confirming 
his  authority,  that  he  might  receive  his  consecra- 
tion with  all  speed. 

38.  When  this  decree  had  been  made  and  de- 
livered, he  and  all  with  him  thanked  God  for  this  gift 
and  authority  that  was  vouchsafed  him ;  of  this  any 
man  soever  may  be  sure,  that  what  elected  this  man 
Laurence  was  rather  Divine  mercy  and  the  guidance 
of  the  Holy  Spirit,  than  show,  riches,  or  bribery;  see- 
ing that  they  who  before  were  his  chief  adversaries 
chose  him  to  this  station;  so  that  this  was  the 
breath  of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  their  breasts,  without 
aid  of  any  of  Laurence'  friends  or  kin.  This  over, 
the  lord  bishop-elect  wrote  to  Lord  Ketil,  who 
was  then  governor  in  Iceland,  and  he  came  to 
Thingeyri,  and  north  to  Sir  Thorstein  the  Official. 
They  all  rode  together,  and  the  lord  bishop-elect 
with  them  to  H61ar ;  where  a  feast  was 
prepared  for  them.  On  St.  Laurence'  A^*°' 
Day  the  decree  of  the  archbishop  about 
the  election  of  Laurence  was  announced  from  the 
choir  by  Lord  Ketil  Thorlaksson.  Then  the  Te 
Deum  was  sung  with  the  ringing  of  bells,  and  Lord 
Ketil  and  Sir  Thorstein  the  Official  led  the  lord 
bishop-elect  to   his   seat.     The  lord  bishop-elect 


80  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  38. 

and  Lord  Ketil  parted  in  the  friendliest  fashion. 
The  lord  bishop-elect  had  an  inspection  of  the 
goods  of  the  church  at  H61ar,  and  for  all  manner 
of  reasons  it  was  very  bare  at  his  coming.  God 
had  shown  before  this  in  the  spring  that  the 
coming  of  Laurence  pleased  him.  For  there  was 
a  whale  drifted  up  on  that  estate  of  the  church  at 
H61ar  which  is  called  Ness  ;  this  whale  was  both 
fine  and  large,  fully  thirty-eight  thousand  four 
hundred  pounds  weight,  so  that  people  could  not 
have  had  a  better  jetsam  come  just  then  upon  the 
place.  The  lord  bishop-elect  took  Skiili  Ingason 
the  priest  back  for  steward  at  H61ar ;  he  had  had 
it  a  long  while  in  the  days  of  Bishop  Jorund,  and 
was  thought  a  good  overseer :  Sir  Haflidi,  when  he 
was  himself  steward,  trained  him  first.  Solvi  he 
made  bailiff,  and  Gudrun,  daughter  of  Skegg,  his 
wife,  he  made  stewardess.  These  two  were  the 
most  experienced  wardens,  and  they  stayed  as  long 
as  he  was  bishop.  Over  all  the  storehouses  of  the 
church  he  appointed  those  of  ripe  counsel,  and 
declared  before  all  men  that  he  would  have  all  the 
rules  kept  just  as  Bishop  Jorund  had  them.  The 
lord  bishop-elect  said  he  would  not  meddle  with 
daily  business,  save  with  his  cellar  and  wardrobe, 
and  the  governing  of  the  clergy ;  and  every  gift  of 
wadmal  that  came  he  made  over  to  the 
Aug.  15  poor.  On  the  first  St.  Mary's  Day  he 
preached,  and  gave  handsomely  to  the 
stout  fellows  who  had  come  to  the  monastery ;  then 
straightway  the  church  and  monastery  seemed  to 
rejoice  at  the  coming  of  such  a  ruler.     After  St. 


ch.  38.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  81 

Mary's  Day  he  rode  north  to  Modruvellir.  There 
were  no  brethren  there,  though  Bishop  Audun  had 
made  provision  for  priests  there ;  brother  Thorgeir 
in  Logmanns  Slope  was  a  sort  of  vicar,  and  brother 
Th6rd  at  Vidivellir  in  Skaga  Firth,  but  brother 
Thorbjorn  and  brother  Brand  had  gone  home  to 
H61ar  and  died  there.  H61ar  Church,  ever  since 
the  monastery  was  burnt,  took  all  the  rent  from 
the  foundation,  and  all  the  goods  that  belonged 
thereto ;  two  priests  were  there  with  a  steward,  and 
two  deacons.  In  such  a  matter  it  could  be  seen 
how  hard  a  task  Lord  Laurence  had  when  he 
came  into  power;  for  he  saw  clearly  that  it 
thwarted  God's  laws  for  religious  men  to  be  out 
in  the  world  like  other  secular  priests;  yet 
the  lord  bishop  was  loath  to  do  aught  to  it 
till  he  met  the  archbishop.  Thence  he  went  to 
Munka-Thvera,  where  there  was  lack  of  a  head, 
Abbot  Th6rir  being,  as  we  said,  deposed  from 
his  abbotship  and  away  in  Norway.  The  lord 
bishop-elect  appointed  Berg  Sokkason  from  Thin- 
geyri  as  a  head  of  the  Thvera  monastery,  in  tem- 
poral as  in  spiritual  matters ;  and  forthwith,  then 
and  there,  brother  Berg  amended  their  ways  unto 
goodness.  Thence  the  lord  bishop-elect  went 
north  to  Grenjadarstad ;  here  Sir  John  Kodransson 
held  the  living  which  had  been  appointed  unto 
him  by  Sir  Thorstein  the  Official.  To  him  also 
the  bishop-elect  gave  full  powers  until  he  should 
return  from  Norway.  Then  the  lord  bishop-elect 
rode  home  to  H61ar  and  wintered  there.  He 
made    6laf    Hjaltason,   who   was   deacon   there, 

F 


82  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  38. 

schoolmaster  at  home  in  the  seat,  and  found  for 
it  scholars  who  came  daily  to  school.  Then 
straight  he  fell  to  taking  count  of  men's  ways  of 
life  in  his  See,  clergy  and  laymen  alike,  admonish- 
ing them  daily  to  quit  the  path  of  sin ;  and  before 
he  was  bishop  he  had  no  bigger  business  than 
this.  The  church  at  Hvamm,  in  Vata-dale,  owned 
two  shares  in  the  home-estate,  the  yeoman  Finn- 
bjorn Sigurdarson  owning  the  third.  The  church 
seemed  to  the  bishop-elect  to  be  in  a  sorry  way, 
for  the  yeoman  Finnbjorn  was  managing  both 
the  church's  share  and  his  own.  The  lord  bishop- 
elect  found  fault  therewith,  and  desired  to  appoint 
some  priest  over  the  church's  share,  while  Finn- 
bjorn should  manage  his  own.  But  Finnbjorn  was 
loath.  It  came  to  this,  that  the  lord  bishop-elect 
dealt  him  an  admonition  to  let  it  go,  saying  that, 
if  he  did  not,  he  would  proceed  against  him.  Or 
else  he  offered  to  buy  his  share  of  him  for  its  full 
worth.  The  end  was,  that  by  good  men's  counsel, 
yeoman  Finnbjorn  sold  his  share  in  the  estate  for 
seven  thousand  two  hundred  ells  of  stuff,  the 
lord  bishop-elect  wishing  the  church  thus  to  have 
the  estate  free  in  its  hands.  He  appointed  over 
it  his  son,  Egil  Grimstiinga,  and  helped  him  to 
move  his  household  thither;  and  to  the  Lady 
Gudnin  and  the  Lady  Thurid  he  lent  Hvamm 
until  his  return  from  Norway.     Early  in   spring 

the  lord  bishop-elect  visited  over  the 
13233'   Western  district,  and  was  at  Breidab61- 

stad,  in  Vestrh<5p,  with  Sir  Thorstein 
1  Shardstone  '  on  the  day  of  John  bishop  of  Holar. 


ch.  38-39.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  83 

The  winter  and  spring  were  then  so  hard  that 
sheep  were  lost ;  still,  on  the  day  of  John  bishop 
of  H61ar,  matters  mended. 

39.  Lord  Gudmund,  abbot  at  Thingeyri,  and 
the  brethren  spoke  to  the  lord  bishop-elect  about 
the  bishop's  tithe.  He  answered  that  he  was  not 
fully  enough  appointed  to  deal  with  it  till  he  was 
consecrated  bishop,  and  he  invited  the  taking  of 
umpires,  by  them  on  their  own  behalf,  by  himself 
on  behalf  of  the  church  at  H61ar ;  and  so  it  was 
settled  between  them.  For  the  side  of  H61ar 
church  he  chose  Sir  John  Kodransson,  while  the 
abbot  and  brethren  chose  Lang-Orm,  provost  at 
West  Firth,  and  holding  the  living  of  Holt  in 
Onund  Firth.  Both  sides  were  to  accept  these 
men's  award  until  the  archbishop  gave  his  own. 
They  were  over  this  arbitration  while  the  bishop- 
elect  was  at  Thingeyri,  and  their  award  was  that 
the  foundation  and  convent  of  Thingeyri  should 
keep  Hjalta  Bank,  which  Bishop  Jorund  had  as- 
signed to  Thingeyri  long  ago ;  but  Bishop  Audun 
had  taken  it  from  them  and  given  it  to  the 
priest  Sir  J6ngeir,  who  abode  there  some  years. 
This  the  abbot  and  friars  thought  a  pitiful  recom- 
pence  for  the  tithe ;  but  so  it  had  to  rest  until  the 
archbishop  should  make  an  end  of  the  matter; 
and  with  this  they  parted. 

In  the  summer  the  bishop-elect  took  ship  in  the 
Krafs  [?  Scratch']  with  Clement  Atlason,  yeoman, 
and  the  people  he  had  with  him.  These  men  went 
with  him,  Sir  Egil  Eyj61fsson,  Sir  Stephen,  Athal- 
brand  Magniisson,  Deacon  Eirek  the  Red,  and 


84  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  39-40. 

ship's  crew.  In  the  summer,  till  he  embarked,  the 
bishop-elect  stayed  at  Modruvellir.  A  day  or  two 
before  they  put  out,  three  ships  came  to  Gaseyri, 
each  a  dinner's  length  after  other,  and  all  from 
Norway.  Hallkel,  yeoman  at  Ungland's-Bowl,  was 
in  one ;  Sigvaldi  in  the  second,  called  the  Elftri, 
and  on  the  third  ship,  called  the  Glbd  \Embers\t 
was  Sir  Snj61f.  The  two  first  ships  lay  off  Gaseyri 
in  harbour  to  begin  with;  they  had  good  wares 
for  the  north  country.  Sir  Snj61f  and  the  bishop- 
elect  met,  and  Snj61f  would  make  him  no  rever- 
ence. Awhile  they  talked,  somewhat  stiffly.  At 
last  the  bishop-elect  asked,  'Wilt  thou  give  me 
the  parting-kiss  ? ' 

Snj61f  answered,  '  Laurence,  kiss  thee  I  will  not ; 
for,  maybe,  as  time  passes,  thou  wouldst  call  it  a 
Judas-kiss.' 

So  they  parted  joylessly. 

40.  Now  to  tell  how  yeoman  Clement  and  the 

lord  bishop-elect   put   forth  from    Gaseyri:    this 

was  on  the  feast-day  of  Abbot  Bertin; 

Sep.  5.  they  had  a  good  wind  north  off  Lang- 
ness,  and  also  eastwards  over  sea;  a 
strong  good  breeze  and  keen  weather.  They  were 
out  only  a  little  time  and  touched  Halogaland, 
in  the  north,  opposite  Brunney.  Where  they  were 
going  was  an  inshore  reef,  but  they  saw  where 
they  had  got  to  and  launched  a  boat.  But  the 
trader  dashed  up  on  the  skerry  quicker  than  they 
thought ;  the  ship  split  from  under,  and  straight- 
way the  keel  was  down,  and  all  the  freight  sank. 
The  lord   bishop-elect,  all   the  women,   and  all 


ch.4o.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  85 

the  less  fighting  folk  went  into  the  boat;  some 
got  to  land  with  spars,  Sir  Egil  with  the  mast-tree. 
All  the  people  reached  land,  save  that  one  woman 
died  on  the  spot,  named  Th6rdfs,  and  known  as 
1  Blossom-cheek.'  The  whole  fund  of  money  mostly 
perished  instantly  on  the  spot;  yet  a  good  deal 
was  saved,  for  they  dragged  up  the  rolls  and  bales 
of  wadmal  and  the  casks  of  train-oil ;  and  of  dried 
fish  there  was  none  on  board.  The  lord  bishop- 
elect  reached  land  first,  yet,  as  might  be  supposed, 
distressfully.  He  was  no  long  time  there  before 
a  freight-ship  was  got  and  hired  for  him  to  go 
south  to  Throndhjem.  On  board  with  him  were 
Sir  Egil  and  Laurence'  son,  brother  Ami,  and 
some  of  his  servants,  with  deacon  Athalbrand ;  Sir 
Stephen,  however,  whom  he  appointed  to  stay 
behind  by  the  wreck,  and  have  all  the  goods 
dragged  up  that  could  be  found,  wintered  there 
with  a  few  servants  of  the  church  at  H61ar.  The 
lord  bishop-elect  came  with  his  train  to  Thrond- 
hjem, and  Lord  Archbishop  Eilif  was  there  in 
the  town.  Laurence  went  up  to  the  bishop's 
house,  and  with  leave  he  entered,  and  fell  down 
before  the  archbishop,  craving  forgiveness  for  his 
transgressions  against  him.  Forthwith  up  got  the 
archbishop's  self,  and  lifted  Laurence,  bidding 
him  welcome.  'All  that  is  remitted  already,' 
said  the  archbishop,  '  as  may  be  seen  in  the  letter 
I  sent  to  you.  Also,  if  in  any  matter  we  have 
dealt  amiss  with  you,  we  pray  you  forgive  it  us.' 
1  That,'  said  Laurence,  ■  was  only  right.'  The  arch- 
bishop bade  him  tell  him  how  he  had  fared  since 


86  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  40. 

he  left  Iceland.  The  lord  bishop-elect  told  him 
how  all  had  befallen,  shipwreck  and  all ;  also  how 
he  and  his  men  had  come  without  stores.  This 
vexed  the  archbishop,  but  he  invited  him  at  his 
own  charges,  as  well  as  his  men,  to  eat  with 
him  in  his  archbishop's  house.  Gladly  the  lord 
bishop-elect  accepted  this ;  as  it  seemed  best  to 
close  with  the  archbishop  in  the  matter.  Sir  Ami, 
known  as  {  Wader,'  was  then  steward  at  the  Arch- 
bishop Eilff's  house,  being  his  sister's  son.  He 
was  archbishop  afterwards  next  to  Archbishop 
Paul,  and  the  bishop-elect's  dearest  friend.  As 
we  said,  it  came  to  pass  that  Laurence  sat  at  table 
with  the  archbishop  the  winter  through.  Sir  Egil 
sat  on  a  steward's  chair,  and  the  others  on  the 
proper  seats.  The  bishop-elect  chose  Stephen 
Hauksson  for  his  cupbearer  and  servant,  because  he 
was  an  Icelander.  Stephen  was  the  greatest  master 
in  many  crafts — goldsmith's  work,  carving,  and 
draughtsmanship,  and  Laurence  made  him  beautify 
the  bowl  of  John  bishop  of  H61ar,  which  John  got 
at  Rome.  This  bowl  had  lain  neglected  at  H61ar 
until  then,  but  Laurence  had  it  beautified,  and 
himself  wrote  the  Latin  verses  thereon  now  graven. 
There  were  many  matters  which  the  lord  bishop- 
elect  had  before  noted  about  all  the  knotty  points 
that  had  come  up  in  H61ar  See  :  he  asked  what 
the  archbishop  thought  was  the  law  upon  these, 
for  in  all  things  he  was  fain  to  observe  the  law. 
There,  with  the  archbishop,  Laurence  wintered, 
and  the  archbishop  in  all  things  did  lovingly  by 
him  and  his  people.    In  the  autumn  of  the  summer 


ch.40-41.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  87 

in  which  Laurence  sailed,  there  came  to  Skalholt 

in  Iceland  Lord  Bishop  John  Halld6rs- 

son.      He  performed  the  consecrations    1323-4 

of  both  Sees :  then  were  consecrated  Sir 

Paul  Thorsteinsson  and  Sir  Olaf  Hjaltason  with 

many  more  consecrated  priests  from  H61ar  diocese. 

41.  Now  must  be  told  how  Lord  Archbishop 
Eilif  summoned  the  bishops  to  him — 
Lord    Audfin,    bishop    of    Bergen   and      1324 
Lord   William,    bishop  of  the  Orkneys. 
These     came     to     Throndhjem     on    John     the 
Baptist's   Day.      Lord  Archbishop  Eilif 
consecrated  Laurence  bishop  with  all  the    june^ 
pomp  and  honour  which  Holy  Church 
keeps   and    observes   in    such    cases ;    with   the 
usual  forms  of  law,  the  aforesaid  bishops  standing 
by.      A   little    before    this,    in   the    spring,    Sir 
Stephen   had   come   south   from   Halogaland    to 
Throndhjem  on  a  trader  with  the  goods  of  the 
church  of  H61ar.     Very  soon  after  the  consecra- 
tion of  Laurence  to  be  bishop,  brother  Ingimund 
Skiituson  laid  a  complaint  against  the  church  of 
Holar  and  Bishop  Laurence,  because   provisions 
had  all  gone  at  Modruvellir  and  all  the  brethren 
were  driven  away,  while  the  church  and  bishop  of 
H61ar   had   laid   hands  on   all   the  rents   of  the 
church  of  Modruvellir.       Ingimund   was  then   a 
brother  at  Elgisetr  of  the  Order  of  St.  Austin. 

To  this  complaint  Laurence  thus  answered, 
*  All  good  people  know  that  the  monastery  at 
Modruvellir  had  gone  to  pieces  when  I  was 
bishop-elect;    inasmuch   as    Bishop  Audun    had 


88  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  41-42. 

charged  the  brethren,  that,  all  because  of  their 
foolish  handling  of  the  light  which  they  had  gone 
tipsily  about  with  on  the  night  they  came  from 
Gaseyri,  the  fire  had  struck  up  into  the  tapestries 
in  the  chancel,  and  some  of  it  down  into  the  chest 
of  vestments ;  which  last  they  opened,  because 
there,  as  it  seemed,  the  fire  was  most  furious. 
Bishop  Audun  said  he  was  not  bound  to  have 
their  monastery  mended,  since  this  damage  had 
come  from  their  own  recklessness.' 

The  archbishop  answered,  '  You  know  well  it  is 
Canon  Law,  that  any  convent  originally  founded, 
is  to  stand,  if  there  be  no  let  or  hindrance,  for 
ever  and  ever.  Further,  if  the  rents  and  revenues 
of  the  church  and  monastery  have  been  settled 
upon  the  H61ar  church,  who  else  shall  be  bound 
to  keep  up  the  cloister,  or  have  it  built,  if  not  the 
bishop  of  H61ar?  But  let  those  brethren  who 
have  been  clearly  proved  guilty  of  what  you  said, 
be  thrust  into  the  strictest  monasteries.  Also 
we  will  appoint  judges-delegate  out  in  Iceland, 
to  give  out  our  judgment  about  the  said  case.' 

Lord  Laurence  said  this  pleased  him  well ;  nor 
was  any  more  done  about  this  case  at  the  time. 

42.  Also  Lord  Abbot  Gudmund  had  now 
written  out  to  the  archbishop  about  the  tithe 
case.  Brother  Ami  read  out  the  whole  process 
and  evidence  of  Thingeyri  monastery  before  the 
Archbishop  and  Chapter.  The  archbishop  said 
he  would  fain  also  hear  Bishop  Laurence'  answer. 
'For,'  he  said,  'we  were  told,  that  when  you 
were  yourself  in  the  monastery,  it  seemed  to  you 


ch.42.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  89 

law  that  the  church  of  Thingeyri  had  a  right  to 
the  bishop's  tithes ;  that  is,  according  to  what 
your  son  the  young  brother  has  told  us.' 

Laurence  answered,  'Thy  news,  my  Lord,  is 
true,  namely  that  when  I  was  in  the  monastery  at 
Thingeyri  I  pleaded  as  best  I  could  that  the 
monastery  had  a  right  to  the  tithes,  according  to 
the  gift  of  St.  John,  first  bishop  of  H61ar,  who 
founded  the  Thingeyri  monastery.  But  though 
he  was  a  good  man,  he  could  not  give  them  for 
longer  than  his  own  life,  or  tie  the  hands  of 
future  bishops  of  H61ar.' 

Brother  Ami,  his  son,  answered,  'What  you 
said  when  you  were  at  Thingeyri  was,  that  there 
was  a  right  to  keep  them,  now  that  the  two 
bishops  after  John  had  agreed  with  him  and 
upheld  the  gift  unalterably.  Now,  those  two 
bishops  after  him  upheld  this;  so  that  one  can 
count  up  seven  bishops  after  him  throughout 
whose  days  the  tithes  remained  with  the  Thingeyri 
monastery,  right  on  until  Bishop  Jorund  con- 
fiscated them  in  the  days  of  Abbot  Vermund.' 

'Thanks,  young  brother,'  said  the  archbishop, 
'  thou  standest  by  thy  own  cloister.  We  beg  you, 
Lord  Laurence,  and  likewise  enjoin  you,  to  give 
the  convent  good  terms,  and  suffer  us  a  right  to 
see  to  it.' 

Bishop  Laurence  said,  'Will  you  confirm 
whatever  agreement  I  and  Abbot  Gudmund, 
with  the  friars,  make  together  ?  ' 

The  archbishop  said  he  would  do  that  gladly. 
No  more  was  done  about  the  business. 


90  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  43-44. 

43.  It  also  happened  now  that  Sir  Egil  asked 
and  got  Grenjadar  living  from  the  archbishop, 
thinking  that  it  was  really  under  his  authority, 
though  it  had  been  lost  by  the  carelessness  of 
Bishop  Audun.  Bishop  Laurence  recompensed 
the  archbishop  in  a  way  that  pleased  him  well, 
for  the  entertainment  of  himself  and  his  people. 
And  when  Lord  Laurence  was  ready  to  go,  he 
took  leave  of  the  archbishop  cheerily.  The  arch- 
bishop gave  goodly  gifts  to  Lord  Laurence,  and 
they  parted  with  true  loving-kindness.  Lord 
Laurence  went  south  to  Bergen  and  took  passage 
in  the  ship  Yeoman  Bassi.  They  put  to  sea,  had 
fair  voyage,  and  came  in  at  Eyri  on  the  selfsame 

day  that  Laurence  had  put  out  from 
Si?24 '    Gaseyri — Bertin's  Day.    Horses  had  been 

got  for  him  ;  and  Lord  Bishop  Laurence 
rode  north  to  H61ar,  and  all  the  folk  at  the  seat 
rejoiced  in  him.  He  chanted  first  mass  at  all 
Holy  Masses. 

44.  Now  must  be  told  how,  as  soon  as  Laurence 
had  settled  down  at  home  at  H61ar,  he  shaped  a 
fair  and  godly  life,  first,  in  what  touched  himself, 
and  after  that  in  all  other  men.  And  we  will  tell, 
point  by  point,  of  his  conduct  of  life,  because 
there  is  in  it  a  pattern  for  many  a  good  man  who 
wishes  to  walk  righteously  both  in  spiritual  and 
temporal  things.  About  the  way  of  his  life  we  have 
here  put  together  nothing  that  we  cannot  before  God 
attest ;  for  this  man  was  so  steadfast  and  settled 
in  his  conduct,  that  all  his  life  he  behaved  himself 
just  as  thou  mightest  have  beheld  him  behave  any 


ch.  44.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  91 

two  days,  night  and  day,  if  thou  hadst  stayed  with 
him.  In  divine  service  he  was  so  constant  and 
devout  that  he  kept  every  service,  matins,  and 
evensong,  masses  and  daily  hours ;  and  no  busi- 
ness bore  so  hard  upon  him,  but  he  let  it  all  go 
by  that  he  might  attend  the  holy  services,  winter 
like  summer,  and  night  like  day.  All  the  clergy 
who  had  to  chant  and  read,  deacons  or  clerks,  he 
disciplined  in  such  wise  that  they  did  it  properly. 
Sir  Olaf  Hjaltason  he  made  schoolmaster,  to  teach 
grammar.  He  received  many  scholars  for  teach- 
ing, rich  men's  sons  and  many  poor  men  also,  and 
had  them  taught  till  they  were  capable.  All  the 
time  that  he  was  bishop,  he  had  a  notably  good 
school  kept ;  brother  Ami  also  taught  many ;  and 
there  were  always  fifteen  or  more  going  to  school. 
Those  who  had  read  had  to  repeat  the  lesson  the 
evening  before  to  the  schoolmaster,  and  be  dealt 
with  by  him  if  they  read  or  chanted  amiss.  Sir 
Valthjof  he  made  choirmaster,  and  his  business 
was  to  settle  what  each  should  chant.  Also  before 
the  highest  of  high-days — Yule  or  Easter  or  St. 
Mary's  Days — he  had  the  priests  and  deacons  and 
all  the  clergy  summoned,  and  then  he  preached 
and  gave  them  a  sermon  on  the  way  it  behoved 
them  to  act  on  each  high-day ;  admonishing  them 
to  confess  above  all  if  they  had  any  sins  in  their 
soul  unshriven.  On  all  high  feast-days  he  led 
the  chanting  himself,  and  chanted  mass  and 
preached  in  so  scholarly  and  devout  a  fashion  that 
many  came  to  repent  and  amend  because  of  it. 
Sir  Valthjof  stood  ever  by  him  and  was  his  chap- 


92  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.44. 

lain.  At  high  mass  he  always  had  the  same 
deacon  to  minister  to  him ;  this  was  Deacon  Einar 
Haflidason,  whom  he  loved  beyond  all  his  clergy, 
and  accounted  as  his  true  and  trusty  friend.  The 
service  of  mass  itself  he  delivered  with  heartfelt 
piety  and  with  tears  welling ;  and  such  compunc- 
tion visited  the  bystanders,  that  in  the  low-chant 21 
there  was  more  weeping  and  catching  of  breath 
to  be  heard  from  them  than  clear  words.  All  the 
signs  of  the  cross  he  made  clearly  and  soberly,  so 
that  it  could  never  seem  too  fast  or  too  slow,  but 
ever  in  due  measure.  After  mass,  when  he  came 
into  the  vestry,  he  sometimes  rebuked  the  deacons 
and  clergy  for  aught  that  seemed  to  him  to  have 
gone  carelessly  in  the  reading  or  chanting  or  other 
matters.  He  could  not  bear  to  see  a  deacon  with 
a  baggy  blouse  under  his  mass-vestments  and 
dalmatic;  that,  he  said  to  them,  was  how  the 
mass-vestments  and  the  stuff  got  torn.  Likewise 
no  priest  or  deacon  durst  have  a  cope  beneath 
his  long  gown,  having  a  choir-cope  outside  it ;  he 
told  them  to  tear  off  the  gear  which  was  tightened 
down  round  them.  He  would  never  allow  singing 
in  two  or  three  parts,  calling  it  fiddler's  folly ;  no, 
they  were  to  chant  plain  song,  just  as  it  was  set 
in  the  choir-books.  In  the  bell-ringing,  he  chose 
to  have  the  same  rule  as  in  the  days  of  Bishop 
Jorund — namely,  to  go  out  about  midnight  in 
winter.  He  liked  those  of  the  clergy  who  had  to 
go  out  to  have  a  good  nap  after  vespers.  Every 
time  he  chanted  mass,  five  paupers  had  to  be 
taken  in  and  given  meat  enough  for  one  meal. 


ch.  45.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  93 

45.  The  course  of  Lord  Bishop  Laurence'  Day 
was  this.  When  the  bell  began  for  matins,  he 
read  the  service  to  the  Virgin  while  he  dressed : 
likewise  the  clergy  read  the  service  to  the  Virgin 
in  the  choir  while  the  bell  rang.  When  it  pealed, 
the  bishop  came  forth  and  was  in  his  seat  all 
matins  chanting  with  the  other  clergy.  After  the 
chanting,  he  went  into  his  quarters,  and  as  soon 
as  he  came  in  he  entered  his  study  and  barred 
himself  in.  No  one  might  go  in  save  he  only; 
and  there  he  stayed  all  alone,  and  in  the  dark 
moreover,  about  a  matins'  space;  and  he  never 
came  forth  to  join  the  rest  but  his  cheeks  were 
wet  with  tears.  Then  he  went  up  into  his  sleeping 
room,  and  when  he  had  gone  to  bed,  a  light  was 
brought  to  him  in  a  lantern,  and  for  long  he  read 
the  Psalter ;  for  a  very  brief  space  drowsiness  stole 
on  him  till  the  bell  rang  for  primes.  He  read 
indoors  as  he  dressed  and  washed.  At  the  bell 
for  fore-mass,  he  went  to  church  and  was  in  his 
place  while  it  was  chanted,  and  gave  the  blessing 
after  mass.  Then  the  bishop  went  out  of  and 
round  the  church.  Every  day  on  which  people 
might  be  coming,  he  sat  in  his  consistory  to  deal 
with  cases  and  do  other  needful  business,  either  of 
people  that  had  come,  or  concerning  the  church. 
This  went  on  till  the  bell  for  terces.  Then  the 
bishop  straightway  went  out,  staying  at  service  till 
after  mass  and  nones ;  then  to  table.  He  made 
all  his  priests  sit  over  his  table,  and  made  them, 
and  all  that  cared  to  come,  glad  with  goodly  cheer 
and  liquor,  either  mead  or  small  ale.     Always  the 


94  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  45. 

bishop  drank  a  cup  to  each  of  his  priests  severally, 
when  he  had  been  let  blood;  and  when  good 
guests  came  to  the  house,  there  was  a  cup  round 
for  each.  All  double  feasts  were  handsomely 
drunk ;  but  on  all  high-days  there  was  no  special 
order,  but  every  one  drank  as  he  would.  Whether 
any  ship  was  at  Iceland  or  not,  just  the  same 
cheer  was  to  be  expected  at  H61ar.  With  all  his 
guests  he  dealt  handsomely;  all  of  mark  sat  up 
in  his  room,  and  those  that  sat  by  him  were  to 
drink  as  they  listed,  each  man  no  more  than  he 
pleased.  Those  who  were  more  eager  to  drink 
were  none  the  more  sought  after,  so  that  it  was 
their  own  fault  who  were  the  worse  for  it.  He 
made  the  priests  always  keep  Yule-feast  hand- 
somely, and  all  the  clergy,  lay-prebendaries,  bailiff, 
and  housekeeper,  and  all  the  servants ;  so  that  all 
had  cheer  enough.  At  Easter  the  entertainment 
was  moderate,  likewise  on  high-days  during  Lent. 
Lord  Laurence  had  such  foresight  that  he  laid  in 
the  drinkables  from  wherever  in  Iceland  he  could 
get  them.  He  always  had  shares  in  two  or  three 
ships  faring  to  Iceland ;  his  managers  were  Grafar- 
Leif  and  Eirek  the  '  Red.'  Most  commonly  H61ar 
church  owned  something  in  the  ships  that  came  to 
Iceland.  He  gave  his  trusty  men  charge  over  his 
cellar ;  Ketil  Hallsson  for  the  two  first  years  of  his 
coming  to  Iceland,  and  afterwards  Deacon  Einar, 
who  kept  it  afterwards  all  the  time  Laurence  was 
bishop.  Daily  after  the  meal,  he  first  walked  and 
then  went  into  his  study  and  studied  books :  he 
wrote  on  his  waxen  tablets  and  noted  what  he 


ch.  45-46.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  95 

especially  wished  to  take  from  the  books,  and  then 
Deacon  Einar  wrote  it  out  in  a  quire  or  book,  to 
be  at  hand  for  the  bishop  when  he  wished  to  look 
at  it  and  have  it  before  him.  No  man  might 
come  up  into  his  quarters  without  asking  leave ; 
a  porter  was  appointed  to  watch  the  lodging  by 
day  and  also  by  night.  Whenever  it  began  to  get 
dark  in  the  winter,  Deacon  Einar  would  tell  to  the 
bishop  in  Norse  lives  of  the  saints,  or  would  some- 
times read  Latin  stories  till  the  vesper  bell ;  at  the 
first  ringing  the  bishop  would  go  straight  out  to 
church,  reading  requiems  with  the  clergy  as  he 
went.  After  evensong  the  bishop  went  home 
to  his  quarters  and  then  to  table.  He  always 
made  some  cleric  read  a  lesson  before  his  table ; 
most  commonly  Oblaud  Thorsteinsson,  deacon, 
did  so.  In  the  evening,  after  the  meal,  the  bishop 
walked  about  the  floor  at  bathing-time,  and  then 
went  to  his  bed  and  had  his  longest  sleep  straight 
on  till  matins.  Lord  Laurence  never  came  into 
the  monastery,  save  sometimes  when  he  was  told 
that  dancing  was  going  on  in  the  evenings.  Then 
he  had  a  lantern  borne  before  him  into  the  great 
room,  forbidding  each  and  all  to  have  dancing 
there  in  the  monastery.  Much  zeal  showed  Lord 
Laurence  about  the  conduct  of  the  clerks,  the  cut 
of  their  hair  and  dress ;  and  against  their  making 
any  show  there  in  his  diocese :  also  about  their 
way  of  life,  especially  where  he  thought  there  was 
excess ;  also  about  those  people  who,  either  by  way 
of  adultery  or  incest,  lived  together  forbiddenly. 
46.  It  is  not  to  be  forgotten,  but  rather  to  be 


96  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE  [ch.  46. 

made  khown  to  righteous  men,  how  many  and  how 
goodly  charities  he  had  endowed  from  the  goods 
of  the  church  at  H61ar  while  he  was  bishop.  All 
the  provost's  revenue  that  came  in  by  fines  or  other 
penalties,  he  gave  to  the  poor  who  needed  it  sorest, 
most  of  all  to  those  who  had  before  had  a  household ; 
to  lepers,  blind  folk,  or  those  who  had  the  worst 
sickness.  For  this  he  appointed  a  priest  to  exact 
the  provost's  revenue ;  Sir  Paul  Thorsteinsson  had 
the  place  first,  and  then  Sir  Bjorn  Ofeigsson.  To 
these  the  bishop  gave  for  their  trouble  such  a  share 
of  the  income  as  he  thought  good ;  and  so  it  stood 
during  his  life.  This  was  a  mighty  help  to  many 
poor  people,  and  every  one  paid  in  with  goodwill. 
Twelve  almsmen  he  established  there  at  Hdlar  and 
in  the  storehouses  of  the  church ;  these  were  both 
fed  and  clad.     In  Lent  five  paupers  were  taken  in 

and  stayed  on  till  over  Easter-week.  On 
Sep.  29    Michaelmas  Day  in  autumn,  the  steward 

had  to  measure  off  two  thousand  four 
hundred  in  wadmal,  and  this  had  to  be  given  to 
the  poor  for  keeping  through  the  winter,  and  till 
after  Whitsun-week.  This  the  guest-man  had  to 
give  out  and  distribute  among  the  paupers  whom 
he  thought  neediest — or  else  the  bishop  directed 
him — before  the  highest  days.  A  trusty,  benevo- 
lent, shrewd  man,  Thorstein  Thorleifsson,  was 
chosen  for  this.  All  the  goods  given  yearly  in 
wadmal  to  the  church  he  had  taken  home  to  his 
quarters,  and  given  to  the  poor. — Also  be  it  noted, 
that  Laurence  had  the  same  apparel  as  monks 
wear,  a  cowl  and  a  long  gown  outermost ;  for  he 


ch.  46-47.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  97 

declared  the  rule  to  be,  that  though  bishops  were 
of  the  black  monks'  order,  they  were  bound  to  have 
the  same  dress  as  that  of  the  rule  they  were  chosen 
to.  A  shirt  of  hair  and  wool  he  wore  next  him.  He 
set  up  a  school  in  the  monastery,  and  had  Latin 
taught.  Sir  Olaf  Hjaltason  then  kept  the  school, 
and  Laurence  gave  him  the  living  of  Vellir  church 
in  Svarfadar-dale,  saying  that  whoever  was  school- 
master at  H61ar  should  always  have  that  living. 
Sir  Valthj6f  taught  chanting. 

47.  During  Laurence's  first  winter  at  H61ar,  there 
was  little  tidings  all  over  Iceland.  Brother  Berg 
Sokkason  was  chosen  by  Lord  Laurence 

1324-5  to  be  abbot  at  Miinka-Thvera,  and  con- 
secrated by  him  at  home  at  H61ar  a  year 
later.  He  was  a  man  of  parts  beyond  most  people 
then  in  Iceland,  in  scholarship,  handwriting,  chant- 
ing, and  eloquence ;  and  he  drew  up  many  histories 
of  the  Saints  in  Norse,  which  shall  be  known  and 
famous  while  this  country  is  peopled.  Moreover 
this  good  man  lived  nobly  in  monastic  discip- 
line. Abbot  Berg  and  Bishop  Laurence  were  the 
dearest  of  friends,  Laurence  being  Berg's  teacher. 
In  the  winter  before  Lent,  Lord  Laurence  sent 
his  son,  brother  Ami,  south  to  Skalholt  to  Lord 
Bishop  John,  begging  him  to  ordain  him  to  all 
orders  up  to  that  of  priest.  Brother  Ami  came 
north  after  Whitsun  week,  now  ordained  priest.  It 
seemed  to  Lord  Bishop  Laurence  a  finer  thing  for 
a  father  not  to  lay  hands  of  consecration  upon  his 
son  after  the  flesh :  nor  did  brother  Ami  ever 
stand  by  his  father,  save  when  he  was  confirming 

G 


98  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  47-48. 

the  young.  Brother  Ami  was  an  excellent  scholar 
and  versifier,  and  taught  many  clerks  :  he  always 
went  with  Lord  Laurence  his  father  on  his  visita- 
tions, and  slept  in  the  same  quarters.  Also  he, 
and  likewise  Deacon  Einar,  had  the  bishop's  signet 
and  the  writing  of  his  letters. 

48.  That  same  winter,  in  the  autumn  before 
which  Bishop  Laurence  came  out,  there  was  a  lull 
in  Iceland  and  no  event  of  note.  The  aforesaid 
bishops  were  in  power,  Lord  John  at  Skalholt,  and 
Lord  Laurence  at  H61ar.  People  said  that  there 
could  never  have  been  better  Latin  scholars  in 
Iceland  than  they  j  also  between  them  at  this  time 
was  the  greatest  affection.  In  the  second  year  of 
Laurence's  bishopric,  he,  with  the  counsel  of  all 
the  learned  in  H61ar  see,  enacted  that  the  feast  of 
Corpus  Christi  should  be  kept  with  the  festal 
chanting  of  a  high-day;  for  this  had  just  been 
proclaimed  by  Bishop  John.  This  high-day  was 
made  law  at  the  General  Moot  in  summer.  In 
autumn  afterwards  Lord  Laurence  performed 
ordinations  at  home  at  H61ar.  It  was  another  of 
the  notable  things  about  his  rule,  that  he  examined 
the  clergy  himself,  and  himself  told  them  to  their 
faces  how  it  beseemed  them  to  behave  in  the 
ordination  they  were  receiving;  and  most  pierc- 
ingly he  overhauled  their  life  and  their  knowledge 
before  he  would  go  on  to  consecrate  them ;  he  laid 
most  upon  the  way  they  chanted  or  read  in  Holy 
Church.  Then  he  said  that  [those  should  not] 
receive  holy  orders,  who  expected  to  have  a  child 
and  would   not   declare  it;   and  when   this   was 


ch.  48.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  99 

discovered  he  laid  heavy  penances  on  them,  and 
made  them  forfeit  his  ministrations  for  a  long 
time. 

In  the  year  after  Lord  Laurence'  coming,  no 
ship  came  to  Iceland.  In  the  spring  afterwards 
Abbot  Gudmund  and  Yeoman  Benedict  Kol- 
beinsson  rode  to  H61ar.  Abbot  Gudmund  in- 
quired how  he  would  settle  about  the  tithes ; 
a  matter  that  had  long  been  stirring  between 
Thingeyri  and  the  church  of  Hdlar.  Thus  said 
Lord  Bishop  Laurence  to  Abbot  Gudmund  : 

1  There  are  two  ways  ;  one  to  complain  about 
the  tithes  before  my  Lord  archbishop ;  the  other, 
to  submit  this  whole  case  into  our  hands  to  be 
set  straight.'  And  with  good  men's  counsel  the 
abbot  elected  that  the  bishop  alone  should  fix 
and  fashion  the  affair  as  he  would,  having  sworn 
before  God  that  Thingeyri  monastery  should  not 
be  the  loser.  Then  the  bishop  pronounced  that 
he  made  over  Hvamm  in  Vatn-dale  to  the 
monastery  at  Thingeyri  for  a  perpetual  possession. 

f  We  know  well,'  said  Bishop  Laurence,  '  that 
every  single  bishop  of  H61ar  has  so  much  power 
and  authority  over  Thingeyri  monastery,  that  the 
abbots  of  Thingeyri  never  lay  claim  to  the  tithes 
of  the  bishops  of  H61ar  west  of  Vatn-dale  river. 
But,  to  the  end  that  our  successors  may  claim  no 
authority  over  the  monastery  at  Thingeyri,  we 
desire  with  this  gift  and  bounty  to  abate  all 
wrangling  and  complaint  while  we  have  any 
choice  in  the  matter.  Also  we  will  write  to  the 
archbishop     asking    him     to    confirm    this    our 


ioo  LIFE  OF  LA  URENCE         [ch.  48-49. 

covenant.'  This  agreement  was  sealed  by  deeds 
and  hand-pledges.  Then  Lord  Laurence  also 
gave  to  Thingeyri  his  brother  Kalf's  donation  j 
it  was  four  thousand  eight  hundred 19  worth,  and 
by  this  gift  Lord  Bishop  Laurence  had  honour 
and  glory,  but  the  monastery  at  Thingeyri  eternal 
gain  and  emolument  while  Hvamm  lasts. 

49.  Thorstein  Kolbeinsson,  the  brother  of 
Benedict,  was  now  dwelling  at  Holtastad  in 
Langadale.  The  Lady  Gudriin,  daughter  of 
Thorstein,  was  mother  of  the  two  brothers. 
Thorstein  was  then  unwed,  but  was  keeping  a 
lawless  union,  for  he  took  Gudriin,  Illugi's 
daughter,  to  live  with  him.  Thorstein  and  Thord 
Loptsson  were  fourth  cousins.  This  living 
together  became  known,  for  she  became  with 
child.  So  openly  did  they  go  about  their  union 
that  he  took  her  to  his  own  bed  as  if  she  were 
his  lawful  wife.  Lord  Laurence  at  first  ad- 
monished him  kindly  to  part  with  her.  But  he 
was  hardened  in  his  perverseness  and  paid  no 
heed  to  the  bishop's  admonitions.  At  last  Bishop 
Laurence  proceeded  with  legal  evidence  against 
Thorstein,  getting  sworn  proof  of  the  kinship 
between  the  said  Thorstein  and  Th6rd,  who  was 
the  husband  of  Gudriin  before  this.  Thereafter 
the  bishop  gave  Thorstein  three  admonitions,  sum- 
moning him  to  H61ar ;  the  last  was  summary,  and 
said  that  if  he  did  not  come  to  the  said  church, 
Laurence  would  excommunicate  them  on  the 
First  Lady-Day  there  at  H61ar,  with  candles 
reversed  and  bell-ringing.     And  inasmuch  as  they 


ch.  49.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  10 i 

came  not  to  the  summons,  but  hardened  their 
hearts,  behaving  as  before,  the  next  thing  was 
that  the  bishop  excommunicated  them  on  Lady- 
day  in  the  chancel  at  H61ar,  with  the  form  which 
Holy  Church  enjoins  should  be  chiefly  used 
against  refractoriness.  Herein  was  manifested  the 
singlemindedness  and  righteousness  of  the  bishop ; 
for  the  Lady  Gudriin  and  Benedict  were  his 
dearest  friends,  and  also  Hallbera,  the  abbess  at 
Stad,  the  Lady  Gudnin's  sister.  Thorstein  also 
had  a  large  following,  being  a  man  very  rich  in 
substance.  Now  it  must  be  told  how  Thorstein 
took  this  procedure  and  this  ban  which  was  going 
forward  at  H61ar  on  Lady-day.  When  he  had 
come  to  table  at  Holtastad,  he  hid  his  face  in  his 
palms,  and  then  looking  up  said : 

'  Gudriin,  methinks  I  feel  that  now  the  bishop 
at  H61ar  is  chanting  a  stern  song  over  you  and 
me  this  day :  I  will  not  tangle  other  folk  in  my 
own  troubles,  and  all  of  you,'  this  he  said  speaking 
to  the  people,  'must  eat  in  here,  and  I  will  go 
hence.'  Then  he  left  the  table,  ate  alone,  and 
slept  alone.  Before  this  the  bishop  had  sent 
away  the  two  priests,  for  he  had  dealt  ruthlessly 
with  them.  For  soon  after  these  doings  the  Lady 
Gudnin  and  Benedict  rode  to  Holtstad,  and 
urged  Thorstein  to  be  reconciled  with  Holy 
Church  and  the  bishop.  The  pair  met  the  bishop 
at  Vellir  in  Svarfadardale,  and  the  bishop  took 
the  ban  off  Thorstein;  and  off  Gudriin  in  Arshaw 
some  days  after.  They  both  swore  to  part,  and 
with  God's  will  part  they  did.     The  bishop  took 


102  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE         [ch.  49-50. 

every  pains  to  chastise  those  under  him  out  of 
evil  ways :  but  he  never  banned  any  other  men 
openly  in  H61ar  see. 

50.  Especially  is  it  to  be  named  and  noted, 
how  Lord  Laurence  was  always  saying  at  the 
synod  of  priests,  that  it  went  past  bounds  that 
those  priests,  who  chanced  to  be  disabled  by  age 
or  other  ailments,  should  be  driven  to  tramp  and 
beg;  the  church  and  her  goods  helping  them  hardly 
at  all.  Accordingly  he  founded  and  ordered  an 
infirmary  for  priests  at  Kvia-Beck  in  Olafs-Firth, 
and  bought  half  of  the  ground  from  priest  Arnod, 
the  church  owning  the  other  half.  There  he  laid 
out  a  great  fund  in  estate  and  live  stock  and  farm 
gear,  and  also  enacted  that  every  priest  in  the 
see  should  contribute  half  a  mark  a  year  for  the 
next  three  years  :  this  swelled  to  a  great  fund. 
Also  over  all  6lafs-Firth  and  all  Flj6t  he  had  a 
lamb  kept  in  each  house,  so  that  soon  as  many  as 
fifty  were  reared,  and  people  ever  after  yielded  them 
up  to  the  bishop  for  his  estates.  None  the  less 
did  Lord  Laurence  reserve  for  the  infirmary  the 
fines  for  misconduct  which  came  in  in  great  suits  ; 
as  for  instance  from  Benedict  Kolbeinsson  and 
Thorstein  his  brother  and  other  men  of  means 
who  were  liable  for  heavy  penances.  He  chose 
Kvia-Beck  in  Olafs-Firth  for  the  infirmary,  because 
he  thought  it  was  a  good  place  for  cod-fish  and 
meat,  well  fitted  for  old  men's  diet.  There  he 
made  overseer  a  young  priest  who  had  been  his 
pupil  of  old  when  he  was  in  Miinka-Thvera,  saying 
he   thought    he   would    have   ripe    judgment   in 


ch.  50.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  103 

managing  the  stock.  This  was  Bjorn  Onundarson, 
priest,  and  he  stayed  steward  here  while  Bishop 
Laurence  lived ;  and  into  his  hand  came  good 
store  of  all  manner  of  live  stock  and  provisions, 
so  that  there  was  no  lack  there  till  Bishop 
Laurence  departed  ;  many  priests  were  then  there. 
This  same  Bjorn  was  long  steward  at  Modruvellir 
in  the  Valley  of  the  Horg,  and  was  a  man  of  ripe 
counsel,  the  words  being  fulfilled  which  Laurence 
foretold  of  him. 

Sir  Snjolf  landed  in  the  south  and  rode  up  to 
H61ar,  having  got  a  letter  from  some  of  the  canons 
who  entreated  Bishop  Laurence  to  make  good 
terms  with  him.  He  would  not  do  a  reverence 
to  Bishop  Laurence,  and  the  bishop  replied  to 
his  speech  not  a  word.  Then  he  went  to  seek 
Bishop  John  at  Skalholt,  and  offered  to  minister 
in  his  see.  John  counselled  Snj61f  to  go  back 
to  Bishop  Laurence. 

1  You  are  bound,'  said  Bishop  John,  '  to  humble 
yourself  before  him,  seeing  he  is  appointed  by 
God  your  superior.  If  you  will  promise  us  this, 
we  will  even  write  north  unto  our  brother.' 
Snjdlf  went  north  to  Laurence  and  made  him  a 
reverence,  falling  on  his  knees.  The  bishop 
asked — 

'  Why  so  little  like  thyself,  compared  with  what 
thou  wert  when  here  last,  Snj61f?' 

1  Because,'  he  said,  '  now  is  my  neck  quit  of  the 
iron  prong22 ;  also  Bishop  John  enjoined  upon  me 
that  I  should  yield  unto  you.'  Then  the  bishop 
rose  up  and  set  him  beside  him,  and  for  that  day 


104  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  50. 

entertained  him,  and  there  was  such  concord 
between  them,  that  he  gave  him  the  benefice  of 
Hals  in  Fnj6ska-dale,  none  other  being  then 
empty.  He  could  say  with  truth  of  Sir  Snj61f, 
that  no  man  dressed  or  feasted  so  finely  as  he ; 
yet  never  did  he  assess  himself  for  tithe  at  more 
than  forty-eight  hundred.  There  was  ever  a 
sharpness  between  them ;  but  it  was  Snj61f  who 
attacked  the  bishop  with  vainglorious  words, 
Once  at  Miinka-Thvera,  when  the  bishop  had 
come  there  on  a  visitation,  this  happened.  When 
the  bishop  was  at  meat  Sir  Snj61f  came  in  and 
found  a  place  set  for  him  at  a  table  by  the  door. 
Then,  as  Snj61f  got  tipsy,  there  came  on  him 
a  spirit  of  cursings  and  revilings  against  the 
bishop.  Very  long-suffering  was  Bishop  Laurence, 
answering  not  a  word,  and  only  breaking  up  the 
feast  after  Our  Lady  had  been  pledged.  That 
night  Snj61f  took  quite  enough  to  drink,  and 
swelled  so  big  as  to  be  on  the  brink  of  peril. 
Then  he  was  belted  about  with  a  linen  kerchief, 
and  his  writhings  seemed  to  the  bystanders  piteous 
to  look  on.  Then  he  begged  for  Lord  Bishop 
Laurence  to  come  to  him ;  which  he  did.  Then 
Sir  Snjolf  prayed  forgiveness  for  the  words  he  had 
said  in  the  evening.  The  bishop  said  he  would 
give  it  blithely,  and  then  read  over  him.  And, 
by  God's  will,  a  little  after,  he  mended.  Sir 
Snjolf  never  again  reviled  Bishop  Laurence  in 
his  life. 

Lord   Laurence   bore  great   friendship   to   Sir 
John  Kodransson,  and  gave  him  a  share  in  the 


ch.  50-51.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  105 

benefice  at  Glen  Hrafna,  and  therewith  a  provost- 
ship  over  Eyja  Firth  and  Dal,  as  far  as  the  Rift  of 
Vard.  He  was  a  most  goodly  scholar,  and  had 
the  church  at  Glen  Hrafna  mended  at  such  cost, 
that  it  would  have  been  long  there  manifest,  had 
it  only  been  kept  up. 

51.  All  the  foremost  men  in  Iceland,  lay  or 
learned,  bore  affection  to  Laurence  while  he  was 
there.  They  could  borrow  from  the  church  on 
condition  that  they  left  gold  or  refined  silver  in 
pawn ;  and  that,  if  repayment  was  not  forth- 
coming, the  church  kept  the  deposit.  Thus  the 
bishop  got  much  treasure  by  their  not  redeeming 
their  pledges.  The  bishop  and  Skiili  Flugumyri 
lent  money  to  Lord  Eirek  Sveinbjarnason  for  four 
years,  he  having  then  the  bailiwick  over  the 
Northern  Quarter.  He  borrowed  over  fourteen 
hundred  and  forty  a  year,  paying  up  some  in  house 
repairs,  more  as  the  church  and  bishop  needed. 
With  rich  men  the  bishop  took  pains  about  fixing 
the  tithe,  especially  with  Gizur  '  Gall,'  yeoman  at 
the  Tongue  of  Vidi-dale ;  naming  three  priests  and 
three  laymen  to  value  his  goods  while  he  was 
entertaining  the  bishop.  At  first  Gizur  was 
stubborn  against  it ;  but  when  he  saw  that  a  ban 
hung  over  him  unless  the  bishop  had  his  way — 
for  the  bishop  desired  him  to  name  three  laymen 
as  valuers — it  was  all  settled,  and  they  valued 
the  goods  at  seven  thousand  two  hundred  more 
than  Gizur  had  before  paid  tithe  on.  Not  many 
people  had  trouble  with  Gizur  after  that.  Lord 
Laurence  had  no  respect  of  persons  in  chastising, 


106  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  51-52. 

and  found  fault  with  aught  which  he  saw  was 
against  God's  laws,  whether  they  who  did  it  were 
rich  or  poor.  It  was  also  notable  how,  when 
Benedict  or  yeoman  Rafn  or  other  men  of  mark 
were  taken  in  adultery,  they  had  to  come  to 
H61ar  on  Maunday  Thursday  and  be  brought  up, 
just  like  other  penitents,  in  a  bearskin;  likewise 
sometimes,  on  Ash  Wednesday  they  who  had 
more  grievously  backslidden.  But  he  bade  them 
sit  by  him  at  banquet  through  Easter,  and  made 
them  welcome.  He  so  managed  because  he 
thought  that  it  would  bring  them  to  the  blush  to 
receive  such  disgrace  publicly  for  their  misdoing, 
and  that  they  would  beware  of  backsliding  again  j 
for  they  would  rather  pay  a  trifle  than  abase 
themselves  like  so  many  nobodies. 

52.  In   the    third    year    of    Lord    Laurence's 
episcopate,  brother  Ingimund  Skutuson  came  from 

Norway  with  writs  of  Lord  Archbishop 
1327      Eilif  concerning  the  case  of  Modruvellir ; 

the  tenor  of  his  decree  was,  that  Lord 
John  Bishop  of  Skalholt  and  Lord  Thorlak,  abbot 
at  Ver,  were  appointed  by  the  archbishop  judges 
delegate  with  power  to  take  evidence,  '  and  with 
authority  so  to  decide  or  quash,  that  a  covenant 
should  be  come  to  in  the  said  suit :  also  to 
summon  on  either  side,  to  wit,  on  behalf  of 
Laurence  Bishop  of  H61ar  Church,  and  for  the 
accusation  on  behalf  of  the  brethren  of  the  afore- 
said cloister.'  And  when  this  decree  reached 
the  aforesaid  judges,  they  issued  summonses  on 
both  sides,  namely  to  Bishop  Laurence  and  the 


ch.  52.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  107 

brethren  of  the  said  cloister  for  the  day  after  the 
first  day  of  St.  Olaf,  at  Modruvellir. 
And  when  all  were  there  assembled,  the  July  30 
brethren,  namely  brother  Thorgeir,  brother 
Th6rd,  and  brother  Ingimund,  all  of  that  order, 
lodged  their  complaint  against  Bishop  Laurence. 
First  then  they  claimed  their  monastery,  to  which 
they  were  consecrated ;  next,  that  the  bishops  of 
Holar,  namely  Audun,  and  now  Laurence,  had 
taken  all  the  income  of  the  monastery  for  the 
church  at  H61ar  ever  since  the  monastery  was 
burnt ;  and  they  had  had  to  provide  for  them- 
selves like  so  many  laymen.  And  for  the  said 
reasons  they  craved  the  judges  to  deal  them  justice. 
To  these  things  Bishop  Laurence  made  answer, 
'All  men  know  that  the  monastery  here  at 
Modruvellir  stood  before  the  fire  and  before  I  was 
chosen  bishop.  Also  the  brethren  were  appointed 
priestly  maintenance.  This  suit  was  also  pleaded, 
and  this  charge  brought  by  brother  Ingimund 
before  the  archbishop  in  Norway  when  we  were 
last  there.  We,  not  having  acted,  have  not  to 
answer  for  our  own  person.  Thus  we  begin  our 
answer ; — in  all  things  are  we  willing  to  answer  to 
and  obey  the  archbishop ;  let  his  ordinance  stand. 
Our  offer  is  to  have  the  monastery  here  at  Modru- 
vellir put  in  repair,  with  all  speed  and  the  best 
means  we  can  find ;  likewise  that  as  many  brethren 
be  received  in  as  were  there  when  Bishop  Jorund 
departed,  with  maintenance  found  in  clothing  and 
victual,  even  as  they  had  in  Bishop  Jorund's  days. 
We  will  appoint  a  prior  over  the  order,  and  be 


108  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  52. 

ourselves  their  abbot,  and  set  a  steward  over  the 
foundation  and  its  funds.  In  grave  matters  all  is 
to  be  done  with  the  counsel  of  the  prior  and 
brethren.  This  monastery  is  to  be  in  all  matters 
spiritual  and  secular  according  as  it  was  founded 
by  Bishop  Jorund  of  excellent  memory.'  At  these 
words  of  Bishop  Laurence  there  was  a  loud 
cheer. 

Then  spoke  first  Bishop  John  :  '  Brethren,  ye 
have  now  heard  the  lord  bishop's  offer ;  it  is  now 
for  yourselves  to  choose;  will  ye  follow  up  the 
accusation  that  is  begun,  or  will  ye  make  a  cove- 
nant according  to  his  offer?'  The  brethren  said 
they  would  take  the  way  he  should  counsel  them. 

John  answered,  '  We  would  call  some  more  men 
of  weight  to  help  us.'  Then  Lord  Laurence  and 
his  following  departed.  He  had  ere  that  called 
all  the  chief  scholars  in  H61ar  See,  and  laymen 
likewise.  After  a  while  Bishop  Laurence  with  his 
following  was  called  in,  and  Bishop  John  spoke 
then  on  the  brethren's  behalf : 

1  Whereas,  lord  bishop,  you  have  made  offer  to 
the  brethren,  utterly  without  compulsion  or  bond 
of  law ;  they  desire  to  choose  that  you  have  the 
monastery  repaired  with  all  speed  and  at  fitting 
charges,  as  you  have  abundant  means,  with  furni- 
ture and  bells  found,  and  all  things  needful  to  the 
ministry  and  service  of  Holy  Church  ;  that  a  prior 
and  warden  be  appointed  over  the  monastery, 
clothed  and  fed  in  a  seemly  style ;  and  that  the 
monastery  and  brethren  be  in  all  ways  established 
as  in  the  days  of  Bishop  Jorund  when  he  first 


ch.  52-53.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  109 


founded  it ;  and  we  twain  here,  judges-delegate 
appointed  by  our  lord  archbishop,  consent,  con- 
firm, and  assure  this  with  our  seals.'  This 
covenant  was  agreed  to,  all  those  aforesaid  con- 
senting with  goodwill  and  affection,  without  any 
compulsion  or  force.  This  agreement  was  made  by 
Bishop  John  joining  their  hands,  and  was  ratified 
after  by  the  hand  and  seal  of  either  party.  The 
most  noble  feast  was  given  at  Modruvellir  to  both 
the  bishops,  to  Abbot  Thorlak,  and  to  all  priests  and 
laymen  that  came.  Thence  they  all  rode  off  to- 
gether, bishops  and  all  aforesaid ;  for  Lord  Laurence 
invited  them  all  home  to  H61ar  to  feast ;  Bishop 
John,  Abbot  Thorlak,  and.  all  their  following.  This 
was  on  the  first  day  of  St.  Olaf.  Lord  Laurence  gave 
the  goodliest  gifts  to  Bishop  John  and  also  to  Abbot 
Thorlak,  and  they  parted  the  best  of  friends  for 
the  nonce.  Thence  they  rode  to  Glaumbaer,  and 
yeoman  Ram  gave  great  gifts  to  John  the  bishop. 
After  that  John  rode  to  Thingeyri,  being  close 
friends  with  Abbot  Gudmund,  and  there  also  was 
loaded  with  goodly  gifts.  He  was  at  Breidabdlstad 
on  the  feast  of  St.  Laurence,  chanted  mass  and 
preached  there ;  and  Sir  Thorstein  gave  him  goodly 
gifts.  Thus  he  rode  west  into  his  diocese,  and 
this  ride  of  Bishop  John's  north  got  him  great 
friends. 

53.  Now  it  must  be  told  how  Bishop  Laurence 
got  together  carpenters,  and  had  the  convent  at 
Modruvellir  done  up,  providing  furniture  and  bells. 
'Apostles"  bells  and  also  five  'singing-maids'23 
were  brought  north  from  Holar;   and  soon  this 


no  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  53. 

was  finished  in  so  good  a  style,  that  it  is  visible 
unto   this   day.     Thus   all   went    on   in 

1328  peace  and  quietness  over  the  summer 
and  right  on  until  the  next  Lent. 

Brother  ingimund,  in  Lent,  rode  south  to  Skal- 
holt,  no  man  at  first  knowing  his  business. 
Brother  Thorgeir  was  appointed  prior  at  Modru- 
vellir,  and  Thorkel  Grimsson  warden.  Hard  on 
Passion  Week  came  a  messenger  from  Bishop 
John  with  letters — close,  short,  and  sharp.  After 
greeting,  it  ran  thus  : 

*  Brother  Ingimund  from  Modruvellir  swooped 
down  on  us  unawares,  like  a  thunderclap,  ere  we 
knew  it.  He  brought  tidings,  Lord  Bishop  Lau- 
rence, that  you  had  not  kept  the  covenant  which 
we  struck  in  summer  at  Modruvellir;  wherefore 
we  see  nought  else  fitting  for  us  but  to  ride  north  in 
the  summer  and  decide  the  said  suit  once  for  all.' 

Upon  this  letter  Bishop  Laurence  was  vexed 
and  wroth,  saying  to  the  man  he  trusted,  that  he 
had  hoped  better  things  of  Bishop  John  when 
they  parted  last  at  H61ar  than  that  he  would  so 
quickly  reverse  his  love  towards  him,  and  trust, 
without  the  least  evidence,  the  tales  of  his  foes, 
that  he  was  breaking  the  covenant  which  he  and  the 
brethren  had  made  between  them,  and  which,  he 
said,  he  desired  to  keep  to  the  last  tittle.  Further, 
that  the  authority  of  Bishop  John  and  Abbot  Thor- 
lak  over  his  covenant  with  the  brethren  to  decide 
over  the  said  case,  was  dead  and  done  with ;  and 
he  showed  thereon  the  canon  law.  And  summon- 
ing his  chief  priests  he  showed  them  the  canon 


ch.  53-54.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  hi 

law  upon  it.  In  spring  after  Easter,  on  the  day  of 
John  Bishop  of  H61ar,  he  sent  Sir  Paul  Thorsteins- 
son  to  Skalholt  with  letters.  He  had  composed 
a  long  letter  wherein  he  set  forth  certain  legal 
points;  namely,  Abbot  Thorlak  and  the  Bishop 
had  no  more  authority  in  the  said  case  to  decide, 
because  of  the  covenant  which  he  had  made  with 
the  brethren.  This  letter  of  Bishop  Laurence  Sir 
Paul  took  to  Bishop  John,  who,  as  soon  as  he  had 
read  it,  was  much  vexed,  saying  that  for  all  this 
letter  he  would  proceed  just  as  before.  Then  he 
asked  Sir  Paul,  would  he  have  to  write  over  again 
what  he  had  writ  before,  namely,  that  he  would 
still  ride  north  in  summer  to  decide  on  the  Modru- 
vellir  case?  But  Sir  Paul  said  he  cared  not 
to  go  back  with  that  letter.  Then,  said  the 
Bishop,  he  would  not  write  another.  Sir  Paul 
went  back  to  H61ar  and  told  Bishop  Laurence 
that  it  stood  thus.  So  time  went  on  till  after 
Whitsun-week. 

54.  On  Trinity  Sunday  two  deacons  and  a  man 
with  them  came  from  Skalholt  to  H61ar.  One 
was  deacon  Th6rd?  son  of  Lawman  Gudmund, 
whom  Laurence  had  taken  quite  a  child  at  Thin- 
geyri,  and  taught  and  spent  all  his  pains  on  teach- 
ing him,  so  that  he  was  the  best  Latin  scholar 
and  a  good  versifier;  ill  it  beseemed  him  to  go 
with  any  errand  contrary  to  the  ordinance  given 
him  by  Bishop  Laurence.  The  other  deacon  was 
called  Gregory.  These  deacons  went  into  the 
vestry  when  the  bishop  was  disrobed.  Th<5rd 
greeted  the  bishop,  saying  that  he  had  a  letter 


U2  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  54. 

and  ordinance  of  Bishop  John  to  read  before  him. 
The  bishop  answered,  that  he  probably  had  an 
ordinance  which  would  be  little  good  to  Holy 
Church  or  to  himself:  'Th6rd,  thou  needst  not 
set  thyself  to  read  any  letters  of  summons  here 
before  me  in  the  church,  for  I  will  hear  none  such.' 
And  when  Th6rd  was  purposing  to  read  out  the 
letter,  the  bishop  sprang  up  and  left  the  vestry 
and  all  the  clergy  with  him. 

And  when  Th6rd  saw  this,  he  said :  '  This 
serves  me  not ;  I  now  see  that  the  bishop 
will  not  hear  the  ordinance  of  Bishop  John.' 
Bishop  Laurence  said  he  would  not  raise  the 
authority  of  Bishop  John  and  Thorlak  from  the 
dead  by  listening  to  any  summons  of  theirs. 
Then  the  bishop  went  to  table  and  asked  the 
deacons  to  eat  with  him;  they  stayed  Sunday, 
and  were  well  feasted  with  meat  and  drink.  On 
the  morrow  after  primes,  they  went  to  table  and 
gave  out  that  they  meant  to  ride  away  speedily, 
and  took  their  horses  and  saddled  them ;  and  as 
soon  as  high  mass  was  sung,  after  offertory  at 
mass,  Deacon  Th6rd  went  before  the  Virgin's  altar 
and  began  the  letter,  Bishop  Laurence  sitting  in 
his  seat.  And  when  Bishop  Laurence  heard 
Th6rd  begin  the  letter,  he  said  : — 

1  Th6rd !  I  forbid  thee  to  read  any  letter  or  to 
make  stir  or  brawling  during  divine  service  of 
mass.'  At  that  instant  Sir  Valthj6f  leapt  from  his 
seat  and  gripped  the  letter  with  both  hands, 
thinking  to  tear  it  from  him.  And  when  the 
bishop  saw  it,  he  called  to  him — 


ch.  54-55.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  113 

'Take  not  the  letter  from  him,  but  put  them, 
letter  and  all,  out  of  the  church,  so  that  they  brawl 
not  in  holy  mass.'  Then  the  clergy  flew  at  them 
from  all  sides,  and  elbowed  them  out  of  church, 
and  locked  the  door  behind  them.  Then  Th6rd 
set  to  reading  out  the  letter  in  the  tower  without 
the  church,  and  afterwards  nailed  it  up  on  the 
church  door  with  iron  nails.  Then  they  jumped 
on  their  horses  which  they  had  tied  outside  the 
churchyard,  and  halted  not  till  they  reached 
Skalholt,  and  told  Bishop  John  how  it  had  fared 
with  their  journey,  and  spared  no  word  of  the  tale 
how  they  had  been  haled  perforce  out  of  church, 
but  hid  utterly  how  the  bishop  had  made  them 
welcome.  Little  pleased  was  Bishop  John;  but 
priests  and  learned  men  saw  the  letter  fixed  on 
the  church  door  at  H61ar  and  read  it.  This  letter 
was  in  Latin,  a  fine  composition,  and  showing 
the  surpassing  scholarship  of  Bishop  John.  The 
tenor  of  the  said  letter  was,  that  Lord  John  and 
Thorlak,  being  judges  by  Archbishop  Eilif  ap- 
pointed, summoned  Bishop  Laurence  to  Modru- 
vellir,  in  the  Horg  Valley,  on  the  plaint  of  the 
brethren  to  hear  their  judgment  between  the 
church  of  H61ar  and  the  convent  of  Modruvellir. 
The  day  of  summons  was  the  morrow  of  the 
translation  of  St.  Benedict. 

55.  Now  to  tell  how  Lord  John  and  Abbot 
Thorlak  made  ready  to  journey  north  over  the 
land.  With  them  travelled  Lord  Ketil  and  many 
great  men  both  lay  and  learned  ;  and  they  reached 
Modruvellir  ere  the  summoning  day,  bringing  their 


ii4  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  55. 

own  victual  and  drink ;  yet  Lord  Laurence  had  ar- 
ranged a  handsome  entertainment  for  them.  Bishop 
Laurence  summoned  to  his  side  the  chief  priests, 
Sir  Thorstein  '  Shardstone,'  Sir  Egil,  Sir  John,  Sir 
Eirik  'Bowl.'  He  had  meant  to  visit  over  the 
northern  quarter,  but  stayed  in  Lauf  Ridge  as  the 
day  of  meeting  drew  near.  There  he  treated  and 
took  counsel  with  his  priests  about  what  was  best 
to  do.  All  agreed  that  he  ought  to  go  to  Modru- 
vellir  on  the  day  of  summons ;  as  it  seemed  likely 
that  the  judges  would  proceed  each  to  his  decision, 
which  would  damage  the  church  at  H61ar  in 
default  of  any  man  to  speak  for  it ;  and  it  seemed 
also  likely  that  they  would  say  he  was  disloyal  to 
the  archbishop,  and  either  interdict  him  or  sum- 
mon him  before  the  archbishop.  He  showed  them 
the  canon  law,  declaring  that  the  people  had  no 
authority  to  give  judgment  after  the  covenant  was 
once  made  between  him  and  the  brethren;  and 
said  that  he  had  in  no  wise  broken  that.  The 
end  was  that  Bishop  Laurence  went  by  his  priests' 
counsel,  and  accompanied  them  by  ship  over  to 
Modruvellir. 

Laurence  and  the  bishop  met  in  the  church,  and 
Lord  Laurence  was  moving  forward  to  kiss  him  ; 
but  he  drew  back,  saying :  '  Is  it  true  that  you 
have  bidden  them  lay  hands  on  my  deacons  in  the 
church  at  H61ar  and  thrust  them  out  ? ' 

1  I  do  not  own  that  I  bade  lay  hands  on  them ; 
but  this  I  own,  that  I  forbade  them  to  brawl  in 
holy  church ;  also  it  was  not  to  my  liking  to  hear 
your  letter.' 


[ch.  55.  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  115 

1  It  is  told  me,'  said  Bishop  John,  '  that  two 
men  did  lay  hands  on  them,  and  they  were  your 
priest  Valthj6f  and  your  scribe  called  Sigurd 
'  Pruning-knife ' :  them  I  hold  excommunicate, 
and  I  will  have  no  commerce  with  them  till  they 
are  cleared;  but  whereas  you  do  not  own  that 
you  commanded  it,  I  will  not  go  so  far  against 
you.' 

Then  many  good  men  tried  their  best  to  make 
a  compromise  between  them.  In  the  evening, 
Bishop  John  chose  to  sit  at  meat  by  his  own 
people,  Laurence  sitting  in  another  room  with  his. 
Next  morning  both  bishops  went  into  the  bishop's 
study,  and  all  the  chief  men  were  summoned 
thither.  The  men  from  the  south  had  a  great 
load  of  canon  law-books  which  had  been  brought 
north.  Bishop  John  opened  his  speech  in  Latin, 
saying  to  all  that  understood  what  had  passed  in 
the  Modruvellir  case,  and  bidding  Lord  Laurence 
answer. 

Lord  Laurence  spoke  in  Norse.  { We  all 
know,  Lord  John,  that  you  have  as  fine  a  flow 
of  Latin  as  of  your  mother-tongue.  But  it  is  not 
understanded  of  the  people.  Therefore,  let  us  talk 
clearly  so  that  all  may  understand.  Thus,  then, 
clearly  say  I ;  that  I  will  keep  and  abide  by  the 
covenant  made  last  summer.  Let  it  be  proved  in 
any  jot,  that  I  or  my  steward  have  started  from  it, 
and  then  I  will  amend  joyfully.'  At  this  speech 
of  his  there  was  a  loud  cheer. 

Bishop  John  answered  :  !  That  deed  which  was 
drawn  last  summer  we  call  a  deed  of  your  sharp 


H6  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  55. 

practice,  and  we  think  that  it  cannot  stand;  for 
the  rules  of  St.  Augustine  fix,  that  an  abbot  or 
prior  who  is  put  in  command  of  the  monastery 
shall  have  authority  both  in  secular  and  spiritual 
things ;  and  therefore  we,  judges  in  this  case  set 
and  appointed,  hold  to  the  prescription  of  the 
rules,  that  the  brethren  here  at  Modruvellir  should 
have  authority  in  secular  things  even  as  within 
their  walls  they  have  in  spiritual.  And  so  it  stands 
far  and  wide  in  monasteries  over  all  the  world; 
for  it  beseems  not  that  the  brethren  be  the  alms- 
men of  laymen  serving  God  as  they  do  night  and 
day.  We  twain  with  God's  will  shall  be  disposed 
to  give  judgment  and  decision  thereon,  if  the 
brethren  are  not  to  get  hold  of  the  rents  and 
maintenance  which  the  rules  ordain;  superiors 
being  merely  appointed  to  have  power  of  control 
over  the  goods  which  belong  to  the  church.  Now, 
if  a  prior  is  appointed  here  at  Modruvellir  over 
the  brethren,  and  is  to  have  no  power  over  their 
goods  of  this  world;  suppose  that  the  brethren 
were  to  ask  him  for  necessary  vesture  or  victuals, 
he  refers  them  to  the  bishop  at  H61ar,  their  abbot, 
and  the  bishop  refers  to  his  steward.  But  it  is  a 
long  day's  journey  between  the  bishop's  seat  at 
H61ar  and  the  monastery  at  Modruvellir,  and  the 
brethren  cannot  suffer  lack  for  ever.  Secondly, 
the  prior  has  to  require  zeal  in  discipline.  Some 
brethren  being  obedient,  some  disobedient,  it  is 
for  the  prior  to  comfort  the  obedient  with  every 
indulgence  that  it  is  fitting  should  comfort  their 
hearts,  and  to  better  their  discipline.     But  now 


ch.  55-56.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  117 

he  has  nothing  to  do  with  it  j  the  bishop's  steward 
at  H61ar  rules  all  the  funds,  and  will  not  yield 
whatever  the  prior  settles.  Do  not  then  the 
obedient  brethren  lose  their  comforts?  and  like 
enough  they  may  fly  into  league  with  the  mal- 
contents. We  twain,  judges  by  the  archbishop 
appointed,  will  never  consent  to  the  prior  and 
brethren  not  having  full  power  over  secular  things, 
even  as  Bishop  Jorund  has  ordained.  And  though 
in  his  main  plan  of  the  monastery  his  scheme 
has  been  goodly,  yet  it  is  fitting  enough  to  mend 
any  flaw  there  may  be  in  his  handiwork.'  Lord 
Bishop  John  spoke  so  finely  with  all  his  eloquence 
that  to  many  there  it  looked  like  the  law  that 
the  prior  and  brethren  should  have  full  power  in 
secular  things. 

56.  Bishop  Laurence  said  he  would  stand  by 
the  covenant  which  the  brethren  and  he  had  made 
in  the  summer  before ;  and  the  longer  the  bishops 
parleyed,  the  stiffer  grew  Lord  Bishop  John. 
Bishop  Laurence  begged  leave  from  the  meeting 
to  confer  with  his  priests ;  and  when  this  was  got 
from  Bishop  John,  Lord  Laurence  asked  the 
priests  and  other  trusty  men  of  his,  what  was  the 
wisest  way  to  take  in  the  said  case.  But  they  all 
threw  it  back  upon  Laurence  himself;  some  how- 
ever gave  ill  counsel  j  but  he  felt  himself  the  spirit 
in  which  it  was  tendered. 

Then  said  Bishop  Laurence :  '  I  see  how  this 
case  will  go ;  if  Bishop  John  and  Abbot  Thorlak 
persist  in  their  decision,  adjudging  all  authority 
to   the  brethren   over  secular  matters  at  Modru- 


n8  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  56. 

vellir,  it  seems  to  us  somewhat  doubtful  that  the 
archbishop  would  reverse  that  decision.  But  even 
though,  for  peace  and  quietness,  it  is  our  doing 
that  the  brethren  have  temporal  control  over  their 
funds,  it  seems  to  us  more  likely  that  the  arch- 
bishop would  annul  that  disposition  of  ours,  if  he 
thought  it  unbefitting,  and  then  there  would  be 
some  hope  of  his  choosing  the  covenant  to  be 
kept  to  which  we  made  last  summer.'  So  this 
point  of  his  plan  was  decided,  namely,  to  obstruct 
the  decision,  and  risk  it.  Then  he  sent  on  to 
them  two  of  his  priests,  who  came  back  with  the 
message  that  on  this  occasion  they  must  go  them- 
selves. Bishop  Laurence  went  into  the  room,  and 
then  the  brethren  were  summoned.  Bishop  John 
asked  Laurence  to  what  agreement  he  would  come 
with  the  brethren. 

'  I  will  choose — what  many  will  put  down  as 
puny  in  me — to  agree  that  the  brethren  at  Modru- 
vellir  shall  have  authority  in  temporal  things, 
rather  than  that  we  wrangle;  provided  the  arch- 
bishop lets  this  settlement  stand.'24 

The  brethren  agreed  to  keep  this  covenant  \  it 
was  ratified  with  hand-pledging  that  the  Lord  prior 
should  have  all  authority  over  the  foundation  and 
all  the  property,  whether  land  or  chattels,  without 
the  walls  even  as  within.  Thorgeir  was  made 
prior,  and  Bishop  Laurence  had  all  the  property 
in  land  and  chattels  made  over  to  him,  and  the 
funds  were  written  off  the  funds  of  H61ar  church. 
And  when  this  was  done,  Lord  John,  Abbot 
Thorlak,  Lord  Ketil  and   all  the  Southrons,  rode 


ch.  56-57.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  119 

south  on  the  fell.  It  was  in  all  the  people's 
mouth  that  Bishop  Laurence  had  let  himself  sing 
quite  small  to  the  Southrons.  The  bishops  parted 
cordially,  as  it  was  right  they  should  in  public; 
yet  not  with  such  hearty  affection  as  in  the 
summer  before.  Bishop  Laurence  visited  over  the 
northern  district  till  Lady-day.  There  were  then 
two  ships  to  Gaseyri  bound  to  Norway  that 
summer. 

57.  Now  to  tell  how  Bishop  Laurence  called  to 
him  Sir  Egil  of  Grenjadarstad,  and  among  other 
things  spoke  thus  in  his  ear  : — '  Everybody  knows 
how  ill  the  Modruvellir  suit  turned  out  last  sum- 
mer ;  I  had  to  yield  before  the  great  power  against 
me,  though  I  thought  I  was  right  in  my  case. 
But  I  like  it  ill,  that  the  case  should  remain  like 
this — namely,  the  brethren  at  Modruvellir  having 
to  rule  the  whole  property.  They  will  squander 
ignorantly  and  foolishly  all  the  funds  which  Bishop 
Jorund  gave  away  from  those  of  H61ar  church,  and 
into  the  clutches  of  fools ;  while  the  agreement 
made  last  summer  is  made  void  and  a  dead  letter 
now,  Sir  Egil,  my  disciple,  seeing  that  thou  art 
best  and  foremost  trusted  to  do  my  will,  I  have 
thought  of  a  journey  to  Norway  in  summer  for 
thee,  with  letters  from  me  to  the  archbishop  on 
business,  touching  the  Modruvellir  case.' 

Sir  Egil  answered  :  '  I  feel  that  I  have  received 
much  good  of  you,  and  that  I  should  be  most 
bounden  to  do  your  will  towards  all  men.  Yet  I 
know  that  I  have  myself  neither  scholarship, 
knowledge,  nor  eloquence  enough  to  go  forward 


120  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  57. 

with  this  business;  this  above  all,  because  such 
mighty  men  have  been  there  to  preside  over  this 
case;  and  also  because  you  have  now  consented 
and  ratified  with  your  own  seal  that  the  brethren 
should  themselves  have  the  secular  power.  I 
perceive  it  will  prove  a  hard  matter  to  take  that 
deed  back.' 

1  Thou  knowest,'  said  Bishop  Laurence,  ■  that  I 
did  that  for  peace  and  quietness ;  consented,  I 
mean,  to  the  second  settlement;  for  I  saw  that 
the  church  of  H61ar  would  take  harm  irreparable, 
if  Bishop  John  and  Thorlak  had  adjudged  the 
management  of  the  funds  to  the  brothers,  and 
much  property  to  boot.' 

At  last,  Bishop  Laurence  begging  and  bidding 
him  to  go,  he  said  :  '  Mighty  is  the  master's  word; 
I  will  do  as  you  will.' 

At  this  the  bishop  rejoiced  greatly,  and  straight- 
way passage  for  Sir  Egil  and  his  page  was  taken 
at  Gaseyri.  Lord  Laurence  sent  the  archbishop 
goodly  gifts,  and  the  whole  case  written  out,  and 
both  the  covenants,  by  Egil's  hand.  He  wrote  a 
schedule  which  he  had  compiled  from  the  canon 
law;  showing  how  after  the  first  covenant  was 
made,  the  power  of  the  deputy  judges  was  over, 
and  they  had  no  more  to  do  with  the  case.  And 
when  the  ship  was  ready  to  go,  Sir  Egil  took  leave 
of  Laurence.  They  soon  had  a  fair  wind  and  a 
good  voyage  after  they  put  to  sea,  and  reached 
Norway  near  Throndhjem.  Sir  Egil  went  with  all 
speed  to  meet  the  archbishop,  and  made  over  to 
him  the  letter,  the  announcement,  and  the  gifts  of 


ch.  57-58.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  121 

Bishop  Laurence.     All  this  the  archbishop  took  in 

good  part,  asking  him  to  winter  there  with  one  lad 

in  his  manor  and  at  his  charges.     Sir  Egil 

1328-9  accepted,  and  sat  through  the  winter  on 
a  steward's  chair,  in  high  favour. 

58.  On  the  other  hand  it  is  to  be  told  how  Lord 
John  heard  that  Bishop  Laurence  was  sending  Sir 
Egil  on  a  voyage;  and  it  seemed  likely  to  him 
that  he  was  going  about  the  Modruvellir  case.  So 
he  sent  the  priest  whom  he  deemed  foremost  in 
his  see,  Sir  Arngrim  Brandsson,  who  had  the 
benefice  of  Oddastad.  Bishop  John  and  Abbot 
Thorlak  wrote  about  Modruvellir,  giving  account 
of  the  last  covenant  made  between  Bishop 
Laurence  and  the  brethren,  and  praying  the 
archbishop  to  stablish  and  ratify  that  settlement. 
Sir  Arngrim  took  ship,  had  a  good  voyage,  reached 
Norway,  went  with  all  speed  to  the  archbishop's 
presence,  and  gave  him  the  letters  of  Bishop  John 
and  Abbot  Thorlak.  The  archbishop  took  it  well, 
asked  Sir  Arngrim  up  to  his  manor  with  one  lad, 
to  have  his  keep  there  through  the  winter,  and 
made  him  sit  on  the  steward's  bench.  The 
steward  gave  both  messengers  one  loft  to  sleep  in, 
and  they  loved  one  another  like  two  brothers  after 
the  flesh.  During  the  winter  their  behaviour  was 
different.  Sir  Egil  got  into  the  archbishop's  good 
graces  as  often  as  he  could,  pleading  his  case  and 
the  arguments  of  which  Laurence  had  already 
given  him  notes.  The  archbishop  soon  perceived 
that  Sir  Egil  was  a  great  scholar  and  lawyer,  and 
Sir  Egil  was  always  in  the  archbishop's  study  at 


122  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  58-59. 

his  ear,  pleading  about  the  Modruvellir  case,  and 
showing  to  him  how  well  the  covenant  which  they 
had  made,  Bishop  Laurence  on  one  side,  and  the 
brethren  of  Modruvellir  on  the  other,  had  been 
kept  in  every  tittle ;  how  he  had  had  their  monas- 
tery mended,  and  a  church  put  up,  with  bells  and 
furniture,  and  proper  maintenance  all  found.  All 
this  Sir  Egil  showed  to  the  archbishop  under  the 
hand  and  seal  of  excellent  priests  and  likewise  of 
laymen  ;  and  the  end  soon  was  that  the  archbishop 
believed  his  pleading  utterly.  But  Sir  Arngrim 
spent  his  days  otherwise,  going  daily  to  an  organ- 
master  then  in  Throndhjem,  and  he  had  so  many 
lessons  on  the  organ  that  he  never  pleaded  about 
the  Modruvellir  case  before  the  archbishop.  The 
messengers  had  the  best  of  entertainment  from  the 
archbishop  through  the  winter. 

59.  Now  to  tell  of  what  went  on  in  Iceland 
after  they  had  gone  to  Norway.  When  the 
brethren  at  Modruvellir  took  control  over  the 
funds,  all  went  improvidently.  Uppsala-Hr61f, 
and  many  yeomen  over  the  Horg  Valley  and  Eyja 
Firth  were  mixed  up  with  Prior  Thorgeir ;  and  it 
was  costly,  because  they  and  their  followers  were 
often  entertained  at  Modruvellir.  But  the 
brethren  supposed  that  they  did  not  receive  from 
Bishop  Laurence  the  funds  which — so  they 
thought — belonged  of  old  to  Modruvellir.  The 
bishop  said,  that  they  had  enough  to  take  care  of, 
and  that  they  were  mismanaging  the  funds  which 
he  had  made  over  to  them.  The  bishop  was  in 
high  displeasure  that  laymen  were  mixed  up  with 


ch.  59.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  123 

them.  In  the  winter  after  Yule  Prior  Thorgeir 
rode  away  from  Modruvellir,  meaning  to  go  south 
to  Skalholt.  He  lodged  at  Reykir  in  Skaga 
Firth,  where  Sir  Thorleif  then  dwelt,  the  best 
harp-player  in  Iceland.  During  the  night  he 
stayed  there,  it  came  to  pass  that  all  the  letters 
which  he  had  in  his  keeping,  and  which  had  been 
stored  in  the  same  building  as  their  saddles, 
were  stolen  from  him.  Many  yeomen  from  Eyja 
Firth  and  the  Horg  Valley  had  sent  letters  by 
the  prior  south  to  Bishop  John  of  Skalholt.  It 
was  laid  to  the  charge  of  Sir  Bjorn  Ofeigsson,  who 
had  then  the  provostship  over  Skaga  Firth,  that 
he  had  sent  thither  the  gallants  of  his  following  to 
get  at  the  letters,  and  that  he  had  taken  them  to 
the  bishop :  but  this  talk  was  never  proved. 
Prior  Thorgeir  went  south  to  Skalholt,  and  there 
met  Lord  Bishop  John  at  home,  who  welcomed 
him  heartily,  and  there  some  nights  he  stayed. 
At  last,  before  Prior  Thorgeir  took  his  leave, 
Lord  John  the  bishop  had  a  very  splendid  gilt 
chalice  brought  out,  and  also  a  pair  of  copes ; 
he  said  :  '  These  treasures  we  wish  to  give  to  the 
church  at  Modruvellir  and  to  St.  Augustine's 
monastery,  for  an  everlasting  possession,  for 
atonement  of  our  sins  and  for  our  soul's  health ; 
we  would  fain  do  this  so  that  no  man  may  truly 
say  that  we  have  in  any  wise  despoiled  the  mon- 
astery, or  taken  any  bribe  to  back  up  the  brethren 
in  their  suit  against  Bishop  Laurence;  nay,  we 
see  nought  surer  in  the  sight  of  God,  than  that 
the   brethren  should  have  full   power   over   their 


124  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  59-60. 

goods,  without  as  within  the  walls,  any  man 
notwithstanding. ' 

Prior  and  bishop  parted  right  cordially.  The 
things  which  Bishop  John  gave  to  the  church  at 
Modruvellir  are  to  be  seen  within  it.  The  prior 
returned  from  his  ride  south;  and  Bishop 
Laurence  was  displeased  that  he  had  gone  into 
another  See  and  not  first  asked  his  leave. 
Uppsala-Hr61f  and  his  following,  yeomen  from 
Eyja  Firth  and  the  Horg  Valley,  were  offended 
with  Bishop  Laurence,  because  the  letters  which 
they  had  sent  with  Prior  Thorgeir  to  Bishop 
John  had  been  stolen,  and  they  laid  it  to 
Laurence'  charge.  But  this  could  not  be  said 
with  any  truth  j  for  he  never  knew  of  the  prior's 
ride  south  till  Sir  Bjorn  told  him  of  it. 

60.  In  the  spring  after  Easter,  Bishop  Laurence 
called  his  friends  to  him,  both  priests  and  laymen, 
and  made  known  to  them  that  he  wished  to  ride 
North  to  Modruvellir,  and  see  how  the  brethren 
there  were  behaving  in  their ,  walk ;  for  news  had 
come  that  there  was  lack  at  Modruvellir  of  meat 
and  hay.  Bishop  Laurence  rode  North  on 
Heljar-dale  heath,  and  reached  Modruvellir  on 
the  day  which  he  had  named  before  in  his  letter. 
As  many  as  forty  men  were  there,  Uppsala-Hr61f 
and  yeomen  from  the  Vale  of  Horg  and  Eyja 
Firth.  No  procession  was  made  to  meet  the 
bishop,  but  there  stood  the  aforesaid  yeomen 
armed.  First  the  bishop  and  his  people  went  to 
the  church  j  there  was  no  sort  of  greeting  for  them 
from  the  brethren.     At  meal-time  the  bishop  sat 


ch.6o.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  125 

in  the  great  room;  it  was  so  disposed  that  the 
yeomen  sat  on  one  dais,  and  the  bishop  and  his 
people  on  another ;  and  the  yeomen  had  from  the 
brethren  far  better  cheer  than  the  bishop  and  his 
people.  There  the  bishop  stayed  one  night ;  not 
speaking  to  the  brethren,  nor  they  to  him. 
Thence  Bishop  Laurence  rode  to  Munka-Thvera, 
and  stayed  two  nights  there ;  there  was  the  finest 
feast  made  for  him  by  Abbot  Berg.  It  was  said 
when  he  rode  from  Modruvellir,  that  he  would 
ride  back  westwards  on  Oxna-dale's  Heath,  and 
not  go  to  Modruvellir.  But  the  bishop  would 
not  change  his  course  like  this.  From  Munka- 
Thvera  he  rode  back  to  Modruvellir.  The 
brethren  had  sent  away  the  crowd ;  and  Benedict 
Kolbeinsson  and  his  lads  were  with  the  bishop. 
In  the  evening  meat  was  given  to  the  bishop  and 
his  folk.  On  the  morrow  Laurence  went  to  the 
chapter  and  brethren,  and  asked  the  prior  to  show 
him  the  stores  and  hay  and  sheep.  The  prior 
and  brethren  said  they  would  show  him  neither 
stores  nor  hay  nor  anything  else.  The  bishop 
asked  for  the  keys,  but  could  not  get  them.  The 
bishop  said  that  he  would  not  be  answerable 
before  God  for  their  waste  of  the  church  funds, 
but  that  the  church  at  H61ar  was  bound  to  make 
restitution  of  any  shortness  in  the  funds.  Then 
the  bishop  made  his  clergy  take  the  keys  from 
them  by  force,  and  had  an  inspection  forthwith  of 
the  stores  j  and  it  was  seen  that  there  was  no  pro- 
visions either  of  meat  or  hay.  He  set  a  steward 
to  manage  the  stores,  and  even  appointed  a  prior 


126  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  60-61. 

also,  Steind6r  the  brother  of  Abbot  Berg.  Prior 
Thorgeir  he  took  along  with  him  perforce,  and  got 
the  whole  management  of  the  monastery  in  his 
hands  before  he  went  home  to  H61ar.  Many  said 
what  sharp  practice  it  seemed  in  Bishop  Laurence 
to  take  into  his  hand  the  whole  temporal  adminis- 
tration of  the  brethren,  before  any  news  came  of 
the  way  the  archbishop  chose  to  settle  it,  or 
whether  he  leaned  more  to  the  mission  of  Sir 
Egil  or  to  that  of  Sir  Arngrim  on  Bishop  John's 
behalf.  Bishop  Laurence  said  he  knew  full  well 
that  the  archbishop's  will  would  be  to  let  the 
covenant  stand  which  was  made  in  the  summer 
before ;  this  he  said  he  knew  by  his  dreams,  and 
likewise  by  his  heart's  boding.  The  word  goes — 
'  Sooth  for  the  soothsayer?  and  so  it  was  here. 
Many  said  that  he  seemed  very  bold,  while  it  was 
doubtful  how  the  archbishop  would  award  on  the 
case. 

61.  Now  to  tell  what  passed  in  Norway,  the 
bishop's  messengers  being  in  the  archbishop's 
manor  through  the  next  winter.  Sir  Egil  pled  his 
bishop's — Lord  Bishop  Laurence' — message  when- 
ever he  could  before  the  archbishop;  but  Sir 
Arngrfm  gave  more  heed  to  picking  up  organ- 
playing,  and  did  not  think  to  plead  before  the 
archbishop  about  the  course  of  the  Modruvellir 
case.  In  spring,  after  Easter,  Sir  Egil  came  before 
the  archbishop  and  said  that  time  was  flying,  that 
he  had  a  long  journey  before  him,  first  south  to 
Bergen  and  thence  to  Iceland;  there  being  no 
passage  to  Iceland  then  from  Throndhjem.     The 


ch.  61.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  127 

archbishop  took  it  well,  and  said  that  he  should  get 
done  whatever  business  he  wished.  He  had  the 
canon  summoned,  who  was  most  skilled  in  writing 
letters  in  Latin,  and  told  him  what  the  business  was 
to  be.  '  Sir  Egil  shall  stay  with  you  and  tell  you 
the  whole  case  to  the  bottom.'  The  master  did 
the  archbishop's  bidding,  and  next  day  the  canon 
showed  to  the  archbishop  the  writ,  which  was 
written  in  lordly  Latin.  Thereupon  the  arch- 
bishop thanked  him  for  ^making  the  writ.  This 
man  was  named  Hakon  Ulfsson  j  he  was  the  arch- 
bishop's souvenir  and  had  his  seal. 

The  archbishop  said  to  him :  '  This  writ  thou 
shalt  seal  and  hand  to  Sir  Egil,  Bishop  Laurence' 
messenger ;  thou  shalt  keep  it  quiet  till  he  is  gone 
from  our  presence ;  for  we  desire  to  hear  and  allow 
no  dispeace  or  pryings  or  party-feuds  in  a  case  like 
this :  let  this  out,  and  if  we  come  to  know  it 
thou  shalt  lose  our  friendship,  and  lose  thy  place 
which  thou  holdest  under  us.' 

Hakon  Ulfsson  sealed  the  writ;  he  was  so 
disloyal  to  his  lord  that  he  showed  that  open  writ 
ere  he  brought  it  to  Sir  Egil,  to  one  of  the  chapter 
there  in  the  manor.  That  same  canon  asked  the 
archbishop,  Was  it  true  that  he  had  made  an  end  of 
the  Icelandic  JModruvellir  case  ?  The  archbishop 
asked  who  had  told  him  that ;  at  first  he  tried  to 
hide  it ;  but  afterwards  he  had  to  tell  the  arch- 
bishop that  Hakon  Ulfsson  had  shown  him  the 
letter.  One  day  the  archbishop  called  his  canons 
together  into  his  public  hall,  and  told  them  him- 
self the  whole  Modruvellir  case ;  how  it  had  fared 


128  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  61-62. 

with  the  covenant  which  Bishop  Laurence  and  the 
brethren  of  Modruvellir  had  made  the  summer 
before,  according  to  the  plan  and  first  foundation 
of  Bishop  Jorund,  of  excellent  memory.  And  he 
now  declared  before  the  canons,  that  that  settle- 
ment ought  immutably  to  stand. 

1  And  we  will  confirm  and  ratify  the  same  with  our 
archiepiscopal  authority,  and  will  not  uphold  any 
other  agreement  that  has  been  come  to  over  there.' 

Then  the  archbishop  had  read  out  the  writ  which 
he  had  issued  thereon,  and  all  the  chapter  gave 
consent  to  this  judgment,  together  with  the  arch- 
bishop. This  done,  Sir  Egil  took  hearty  leave  of 
Archbishop  Eilif,  who  gave  him  at  parting  a  fair 
silver  basin  and  the  canon-law  book  called 
Tancred.  Sir  Egil  left  the  archbishop's  presence 
in  great  state,  but  Sir  Arngrim  kept  in  the  back- 
ground, seeing  that  the  archbishop  was  utterly 
resolved  that  the  suit  should  go  in  the  way  now 
proclaimed.  But,  for  the  disloyalty  done  by 
Hakon  Ulfsson,  the  archbishop  had  him  cast  into 
a  dungeon,  and  never  after  did  he  keep  the  said 
Hakon  by  him  in  any  trust. 

62.  South  to  Bergen  went  Sir  Egil,  and  lit  on  a 
ship  trading  to  Iceland.  They  had  a  fair  voyage, 
and  reached  Eyri  safe  and  sound  before  St. 
Laurence'  Day;  two  nights  after  St.  Laurence' 
Day,  Sir  Egil  got  home  to  H61ar,  and  Bishop 
Laurence  rejoiced  at  his  coming.  And  when  Sir 
Egil  showed  him  the  writ  and  decree  of  the  arch- 
bishop, and  how  the  Modruvellir  suit  had  gone, 
he  thanked  God  for  it,  and  likewise  Sir  Egil  for 


ch.  62.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  129 

his  true  and  sturdy  heed  of  his  master's  business ; 
the  archbishop  having  written  how  loyally  he  had 
done  it.  Then  Bishop  Laurence  had  the  writ  put 
from  Latin  into  Norse  to  be  discerned  and  under- 
standed  of  the  people.  Much  glory  Bishop 
Laurence  got  from  the  result  of  this  lawing.  Later 
the  writ  was  read  out  in  the  chancel  in  the  sermon, 
and  also  before  the  brethren  at  Modruvellir,  and 
was  made  known  abroad  elsewhere.  The  maligners 
of  Bishop  Laurence  were  very  dumb  now.  Sooth 
to  say,  each  of  the  bishops  had  much  to  say  for 
his  own  side  of  the  case.  Lord  John  wished  that 
the  laws  should  be  kept ;  for  the  laws  and  rules  of 
St.  Augustine  really  are  that  the  brethren  should 
control  secular  things  without  the  walls  even  as 
within  they  control  the  conduct  and  discipline; 
and  that  it  is  unseemly  for  them  to  be  almsmen  of 
laics ;  as  Lord  Bishop  John  himself  bore  witness 
at  Modruvellir,  and  as  is  told  above  in  the  history. 
Whereas  Bishop  Laurence  wished  to  hold  by  the 
state  things  were  in  when  Bishop  Jorund  first 
founded  the  monastery.  Therefore  they  who  hear 
this  history  must  not  blame  or  blemish  either  of 
the  aforesaid  bishops  in  this  matter,  for  each  most 
likely  thought  he  was  upholding  the  just  cause. 
Nor  was  the  way  in  which  the  archbishop  chose  to 
judge  this  case  any  discredit  to  Bishop  John  in 
the  end.  Never  again  could  Bishops  John  and 
Laurence  have  the  old  cordiality,  but  Bishop  John 
showed  high  displeasure  at  the  way  the  archbishop 
had  dealt  with  the  Modruvellir  case.  Bishop 
Laurence  now  took  unto  him  the  whole  power  at 
1 


130  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.62. 

Modruvellir,  appointing  them  an  overseer,  and 
dealing  with  the  brethren  in  all  ways  according  to 
the  bidding  and  ordinance  of  Bishop  Jorund  when 
he  founded  the  monastery.  But  the  yeoman  who 
had  meddled  with  the  brethren,  the  bishop  pro- 
claimed under  ban ;  namely  Uppsala-Hr61f.  The 
tenor  of  the  charges  made  by  those  who  passed 
between  the  Bishop  and  Hr61f  was  this  : — the 
bishop  was  told  that  Hr61f  had  made  with  the 
priest  Klaeng  Hjaltason  a  privy  bargain  for  Klaeng's 
wife  Arnbjorg.  This  was  not  clearly  proven,  but 
witness  was  alleged  to  be  forthcoming  that  Klaeng 
had  taken  Hrdlf  s  money.  It  happened  later  that 
the  bishop  brought  many  charges  against  Hr61f  and 
put  him  out  of  the  church.  Hr61f  stayed  under 
this  ban  till  Bishop  Laurence  died.  Bishop 
Laurence  wished  to  keep  the  laws  of  Holy 
Church,  with  whomsoever  he  had  to  deal.  But 
he  also  looked  narrowly  to  penances,  as  might  be 
shown  from  a  thing  that  befell  in  his  days.  A 
cleric,  consecrated  sub-deacon,  born  in  Fnj6ska- 
Dale,  went  to  the  East  Firths,  and  came  into  the 
district  of  Flj6ts-Dale,  and  so  to  Valthj6fstad. 
And  when  he  had  come  there  he  was  so  puffed  up 
with  great  wickedness  and  monstrous  foolhardi- 
ness,  that  he  gave  himself  out  for  a  mass-deacon 
and  asked  to  read  the  gospel  at  mass.  A  stole 
was  brought  him,  and  when  he  began  to  read 
the  gospels,  all  the  lights  went  out  in  the  church, 
and  as  often  as  the  people  there  tried  to  light 
them,  it  was  just  as  if  a  blast  came  on  them. 
The  deacon's  lesson  went  on,  but  the  lights  could 


ch.  62.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  131 

not  be  kindled;  this  seemed  a  strange  thing  to 
the  people  there,  but  at  first  they  suspected 
nought  from  it.  Also  he  betook  himself  to 
another  church  to  read  the  gospel,  and  all  went 
as  at  Valthj6f's  church;  all  the  lights  went  out 
and  could  not  be  kindled.  A  suspicion  now 
sprang  up  that  he  was  only  consecrated  a  sub- 
deacon,  and  not  a  mass-deacon.  This  was  told 
to  Bishop  John ;  then  he  told  his  provost  to 
make  the  man  go,  little  as  he  might  like  it,  west 
to  H61ar.  This  was  done,  and  the  man  owned 
that  he  had  twice  publicly  read  the  gospel  in 
mass.  It  seemed  to  Lord  Bishop  Laurence  that 
the  case  appertained  to  Bishop  John,  because  the 
man  had  sinned  in  John's  diocese.  So  he  sent 
the  deacon  south  to  John  and  two  men  with  him 
that  he  might  not  give  them  the  slip  anywhere. 
Then  Bishop  John  sent  a  letter  by  him  north  to 
Bishop  Laurence,  giving  him  authority  by  let- 
ters-patent to  set  the  man  a  fitting  penance  and 
absolve  him.  This,  among  other  things,  was  the 
penance  the  bishop  set  him ;  six  mass-deacons  were 
each  to  whip  him  on  the  bare  back  so  smartly 
that  the  blood  came.  For  the  bishop  proclaimed 
that  with  unheard-of  presumption  he  had  intruded 
into  the  deacon's  office ;  and  therefore  it  was  right 
for  him  to  be  smitten  by  deacons,  whose  office  he 
took  upon  him  without  holy  ordination.  Then 
he  absolved  the  cleric,  telling  him  that  he  should 
never  be  legally  ordained  unless  the  pope  gave 
him  dispensation.  Also  it  came  about  that  this 
deacon  got  the  name  of  "Gadding"  Ami. 


132  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  62-63. 

In  the  year  when  these  things  happened,  sad 
news  came  of  a  fire  at  Christ  Church  in  Nidar6s 
of  all  the  woodwork ;  and  the  wall  split  in  many 
places,  the  bells  were  destroyed  and  many 
treasures  besides.  The  a'rchbishops  wrote  of  this 
mishap  to  the  bishops  in  Iceland.  An  offering 
was  asked  for  the  church  over  all  the  country, 
and  much  money  given. 

63.  At  this  time  Bishop  Laurence  employed  a 
goldsmith  called  Eyjolf,  a  good  craftsman.  Bishop 
Laurence  made  him  work  two  very  splendid 
gospel  books  for  the  church  at  H61ar,  which  can 
yet   be  seen  there;  also  a  goodly  chalice.     The 

bishop  got  angry  with  him  for  the  high 
Sep3t2%   wages  °f  ms  smith's  work ;  they  seemed 

more  than  their  worth.  The  bishop 
bargained  with  the  goldsmith  that  he  should  come 
back  in   the   autumn    on    Michaelmas    day,    and 

work    Laurence'   shrine    there    through 
June  17    the  winter.     In  the  spring,  close  on  St. 

Botolph's  Eve,  a  ship  from  Norway 
touched  at  Gaseyri,  and  over  this  ship  was  Berg 
J6nsson,  the  archbishop's  steward.  The  ship 
came  from  Throndhjem.  The  said  Berg  came  to 
Holar  and  brought  Bishop  Laurence  a  very  goodly 
mitre  which  Lord  Archbishop  Eilif  sent  him,  and 
two  boxes  therewith  holding  balsam :  this  mitre  is 
now  the  best  at  H61ar.  Such  a  thing  showed 
what  affection  the  archbishop  bore  to  him.  In 
recompence  for  this  he  gave  thirty  bales  of 
wadmal,  and  asked  Berg  to  stay  the  winter  at 
Holar,   which   he   accepted.      In   winter   Bishop 


ch.  63-64.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  133 

Laurence  visited  over  the  western  district.  He 
was  at  Kiila  at  the  wedding  feast  of  John  and 
Ingigerd,  and  most  of  the  great  men  in  Iceland 
were  there.  Lord  Bishop  Laurence  preached 
there,  and  his  loving  yet  devout  way  of  discourse 
was  the  admiration  of  many  discerning  people.  On 

Michaelmas  Day  there  was  a  spell  of  frost 
Oct.  13    and  snow,  and  Bishop  Laurence  said  that 

he  was  sure  the  winter  would  be  hard. 
Then  he  came  to  H61ar  on  the  Feast  of  Relics. 

Then  it  came  to  pass  that  Hallbera,  abbess  at 
Stad,  died.    Bishop  Laurence  was  then  summoned, 

and  sent  word  that  he  would  come   to 
I3303'    t^ie  sisters  a^ter  Yule,  nigh  on  Epiphany ; 

as  was  done.  Then  Sister  Gudny, 
daughter  of  Helgi,  was  chosen  abbess,  but  was 
only  consecrated  by  Bishop  Egil,  successor  of 
Bishop  Laurence. 

64.  This  winter  was  most  bitter  weather.    There 
was  scant  hay  and  much  live  stock  in  the  church 

farm.  Bishop  Laurence  had  written 
1329-133°    home  to  Steward  Skuli  that  he  was  to 

kill  a  good  deal,  for  he  said  at  Michael- 
mas that  he  thought  the  winter  would  be  hard. 
Skuli  complied  not  with  the  bishop's  words,  and 
had  no  greater  a  killing  than  common.  In  winter 
came  the  time  for  the  ewes  to  be  in  heat,  but  the 
earth  was  snowbound.  The  bishop  admonished 
Skuli  to  slaughter  the  cattle;  for  it  was  now 
reported  that  the  stock  of  the  church  was  without 
food.  Skuli  took  little  heed  of  the  bishop's  words, 
and  fewer  were  slain  than  ever. 


134  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  64. 

After  Yule  brother  Ami  took  a  great  sickness, 

and  was  down  a  long  time  through  the 

i33r      winter.     Great  searchings  of  heart   had 

Lord   Bishop   Laurence   because  of  his 

shocking  way  of  life,  all  in  the  teeth  of  cloister 

discipline.     In  the  winter  on  the  day  of 

March  3  the  translation  of  Bishop  John,  it  came 

to  pass,  that  great  pains  troubled  him ; 

and  as   soon   as   Bishop   Laurence   prayed   over 

brother  Ami,  he  mended. 

Once  in  Lent  the  bishop  came  to  him,  and 
spoke  very  sternly  to  him,  admonishing  him  to 
repent  of  his  courses,  and  saying  thus  :  '  If  thou 
wilt  vow  to  God  and  to  me  that  thou  wilt  go 
straightway  back  to  the  monastery  at  Thingeyri, 
when  thou  losest  me,  then  I  will  dare — though 
thou  deserve  it  not — to  pray  God  for  thee  that 
thou  mend  of  this  sickness.  For  in  the  monastery 
at  Thingeyri  thou  canst  live  very  cleanly,  canst 
teach  and  write.  But  if  it  is  in  thy  mind  to  break 
this  our  bidding,  and  to  go  to  Norway  when  thou 
losest  us,  then  thy  counsel  cannot  thrive,  for  we 
know  that  thou  wilt  fall  to  swilling  and  other 
iniquity,  and  then  Holy  Church  gets  no  good  of 
thy  parts.' 

The  bishop  ceased  not  till  Ami  was  touched 
and  wept  bitterly,  promising  to  go  back  to 
Thingeyri  and  abide  there,  as  soon  as  he  lost  the 
bishop.  Which  promise  of  his  was  kept  less  than 
beseemed  him ;  for  his  course  of  life  was  even  as 
his  father  foretold.  The  weather  began  to  worsen, 
and  times  continued  to  be  hard ;  at  last  the  sheep 


ch.  64-65.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  135 

dropped  down  for  leanness  like  drifting  waves. 
It  had  been  better  to  follow  the  will  of  Bishop 
Laurence  and  slay  them  while  there  was  flesh  on 
them,  than  that  no  man  should  have  good  of 
them.  Laurence  was  a  man  of  such  foresight 
that  much  went  according  as  he  foretold. 

65.  On  the  eve   of  the   Annunciation   of  the 
Blessed  Virgin  Mary,  when  Bishop  Laurence  was 

thinking  of  going  to  evensong,    he   felt 
March  19  heavy  and  ill  just  as  the  bell  was  going, 

and  said  to  his  close  friend,  Deacon  Einar 
Haflidason,  that  he  could  not  go  out  to  evensong, 
but  begged  him  to  go  and  chant,  some  of  the  clergy 
being  ill.  This  sickness  which  Lord  Laurence  then 
took,  grew  on  him  from  day  to  day,  so  that  he  ate 
well  nigh  nothing,  which  was  a  drain  upon  his 
strength.  Yet  he  went  every  day  to  High  Mass, 
leaning  upon  Deacon  Einar.  Lady  Day  was  that 
year  the  Monday  in  the  last  week  of  Lent.     Ill  as 

he  was,  he  never  broke  his  dry  fast.     On 
March  31  Easter  Day  he  was  at  offices,  sitting  in 

his  seat ;  had  mass  said  to  him  in  the 
vestry,  and  received  the  Lord's  Body.  Through 
the  day  he  did  not  sit  indoors  with  the  priests. 
But  at  evening  he  grew  worse.  And  when  the  rest 
were  gone  to  sleep,  he  roamed  about  the  timber 
hall,  and  got  himself  upon  the  dais.  He  sent 
Deacon  Einar  out  to  see  where  the  star  had 
reached,25  and  when  the  deacon  came  back,  the 
bishop  said  to  him  : 

1  Friend,  I  dreamed  a  dream.     I  thought  I  was 
lying  on  the  dais,  and  I  held  up  my  right  hand. 


136  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  65. 

And  methought  I  had  in  my  hand  the  bone  of  a 
saint ;  it  was  a  long  bone,  and  I  thought  I  would 
have  that  bone  kept  in  St.  Laurence's  shrine.' 

Now  the  bishop  had  made  Eyjolf  the  goldsmith 
make  in  the  winter  that  shrine  which  now  may  be 
seen  above  the  high  altar  at  H61ar. 

Deacon  Einar  answered :  '  This  is  a  perfect 
dream  and  a  devout.' 

The  bishop  answered  :  'In  my  hand,  there,  I 
had  a  hard  feeling,  for  the  bone  is  hard ;  and  that 
will  be  a  token  of  my  sickness.' 

Next  day,  in  Easter  week,  he  went  very  ill  into 

his  study,  sat  in  his  chair,  and  bade  Deacon  Einar 

drag  out  a  great  chest,  giving   him  the 

1331,  key  to  open  it.  The  bishop  himself  had 
APril  *  the  key  to  this  chest,  the  deacon  having 
keys  to  all  others  in  the  wardrobe.  Him 
he  bade  take  up  everything  from  the  chest  and  lay 
it  out  on  the  floor.  Then  the  deacon  counted  out 
fifty  pence,  two  rosaries  of  silver,  weighing  thirty- 
seven  marks,  twenty-three  silver  spoons,  five 
brooches  and  three  lockets,  some  old,  broken 
silver,  and  a  few  English  pennies.  These  weighed 
twenty-six  marks  and  a  quarter.  Also  there  were 
a  chalice,  a  silver  belt,  three  girdles,  and  tablets  of 
walrus  tusk.  Besides,  he  took  out  of  a  box  ten 
gold  rings,  having  summoned  Skuli  the  steward. 

Then  said  the  bishop  to  him  and  the  deacon : 
1  Here  may  ye  see  what  things  I  have  got  and 
gathered  for  the  church  here  at  H61ar  since  I  have 
been  bishop.  To  this  have  gone  my  bishop's 
tithes.    Some  of  these  I  have  bought ;  some,  good 


ch.65.]  BISHOP  OF  HdLAR.  137 

friends  of  mine  have  given  me,  and  I  have  gathered 
what  I  thought  would  best  suit  the  church.' 

Then  answered  Skiili :  '  The  church  would  seem 
to  me  to  want  meat  and  live  beasts  more  than 
these.' 

'Say  not  so,  Skiili,'  said  the  deacon,  'nothing 
can  be  more  precious  or  needful  to  the  church 
than  gold  or  refined  silver,  for  with  this  refined 
silver  and  gold  the  bishop  can  have  many  a  blessed 
thing  wrought  to  deck  the  church  withal,  if  he  will 
have  a  shrine  or  altar-piece  made  over  the  high 
altar.' 

Then  the  bishop  spoke :  '  What  you  two  were 
heard  to  say  just  now  came  verily  from  your 
wisdom.  Thou,  Skiili,  hast  not  looked  well  after 
the  live  stock  of  the  church,  so  that  they  have 
starved  and  perished,  and  there  is  no  use  of  them. 
But  this  which  you  see  now  perishes  not  unless  it 
be  wasted  of  men.' 

Then  the  bishop  bade  them  put  the  things  back 
as  before.  Sir  Laurence  sent  a  man  west  to 
Breidabolstad  to  Sir  Thorstein  with  a  letter  bidding 
him  come  north  with  all  speed.  Another  letter 
was  sent  to  Grenjadarstad  to  Sir  Egil,  bidding  him 
come  to  H61ar  as  swiftly  as  he  might.  Sir  Thor- 
stein came  on  the  Sunday  after  Easter, 

April  7    and  the  bishop  rejoiced  much  at    him. 

April  8    On  Monday  the  bishop  announced    to 

Sir  Thorstein  that  he  wished  to  make  his 

will  and  all  his  dispositions ;  saying  he  foresaw  that 

he  would  depart  because  of  this  sickness.    Then  he 

told  how  he  disposed  about  himself.     Sir  Egil  was 


138  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.  65. 

not  yet  come.  Sir  Thorstein  Illugason  he  made 
his  Official  and  vicar  in  spiritual  things  till  another 
bishop  came  to  look  after  them.  The  clergy  then 
staying  on  the  foundation  were  to  have  their  table 
there  till  another  bishop  came.  There  were  also 
other  such  elsewhere,  which  made  eight  or  nine 
poor  clergy  whom  he  had  taken  from  poverty  and 
beggary  and  had  taught  the  psalter  and  chanting 
and  Latin,  so  that  then  they  were  as  good  priests 
as  the  rest.  To  the  church  of  Thingeyri  and  to 
Miinka-Thvera  he  made  a  gift,  twelve  hundred  to 
each  monastery,  and  likewise  twelve  hundred  to  the 
brethren  at  Modruvellir  for  their  comfort.  Also 
all  the  almsmen  were  to  stay  on  the  foundation 
and  in  its  outlying  parts  till  another  bishop  came. 
To  Sir  Thorstein  he  gave  twenty  yards  of  cloth, 
twelve  hundred  worth  of  stuff,  and  a  goodly  gold 
ring ;  to  each  of  the  choir  priests  a  goodly  gown. 
To  Steward  Skiili  he  gave  fifteen  yards  of  cloth 
and  a  coat. 

To  Deacon  Einar  he  thus  spoke  :  '  Our  parting 
is  now  other  than  I  had  meant ;  for  I  had  meant 
to  consecrate  thee  priest  and  give  thee  some  such 
rich  benefice  as  thou  deservest.  As  it  is,  we  will 
give  thee,  for  thy  comfort,  and  in  return  for  thy 
loyal  and  trusty  service  to  us,  a  whole  suit  of  cloth, 
two  tabard-kirtles  with  a  hood.  For  this  shalt 
thou  measure  out  of  the  wardrobe  thirty  ells  of 
linen,  also  thou  shalt  have  whatever  pillow  for  thy 
head  thou  choosest,  and  a  pair  of  shoes.  Thou 
deservest  better  for  thy  trusty  service  to  us,  and 
we  bid  you,  Sir  Thorstein,  my  friend,  to  send  him 


ch.65.]  BISHOP  OF  H6LAR.  139 

south  to  Skalholt  and  have  him  consecrated  by 
Bishop  John,  so  that  he  be  hereafter  choir  priest 
here  at  home  till  a  bishop  come.  He  has  been 
my  one  pupil  who  has  never  done  aught  against 
me  while  he  has  been  in  my  service.' 

To  everybody  at  the  church  he  gave  some  keep- 
sake :  to  each  of  the  deacons  six  ells  of  linen :  to 
Solvi,  the  house-steward,  six  hundred ;  to  Gudnin, 
the  stewardess,  eight  yards  of  red  cloth  and  a 
psalter,  to  Thorir  Isleifson,  the  guestman,  a  hun- 
dred and  twenty ;  to  Sigurd,  the  cook,  a  mortgage, 
north  in  Myrk-Water.  Brother  Ami,  his  son,  he 
appointed  to  go  back  to  his  monastery  at  Thin- 
geyri,  sending  a  letter  by  him  to  Abbot  Gudmund 
to  say  what  he  bequeathed  to  the  monastery  of  the 
treasure  which  he  had :  this  was  nearly  eighteen 
hundred,  and  his  clothes  and  books  to  boot.     All 

this  was  done  on  the  Monday;  on  the 
April  9    Tuesday  he  made  his  confession  to  Sir 

Thorstein.  Then  were  called  all  the 
clerks  and  those  of  the  servants  at  the  church  who 
cared  to  attend.  Sir  Thorstein  gave  him  extreme 
unction,  and  before  he  was  anointed  the  bishop 
spoke  again,  declaring,  concerning  the  people  he 
had  put  under  the  ban,  namely  Uppsala-Hr61f  and 
his  train,  that  they  should  so  remain  till  another 
bishop  arrived ;  unless  they  were  to  swear  to  stand 
to  the  judgment  of  Holy  Church,  in  which  case 
the  Official  was  to  absolve  them.  After  this  speech 
of  the  bishop  he  was  anointed :  and  when  the 
body  of  God  was  brought  to  him  he  made  a  dis- 
course so  long  and  beautiful  that  many  who  were 


i4o  LIFE  OF  LAURENCE  [ch.65. 

there  wept,  and  himself  most.  Now  on  Tuesday, 
when,  as  we  have  said,  the  unction  was  over,  his 
strength  sank  and  sank ;  nevertheless  he  read  his 
offices,  and  ever  through  his  illness  he  had  read 
unto  him  the  Expositio?ies  of  St.  Gregory  the  pope 
and  the  prayers  of  Augustine ;  and  while  he  was 
ill,  he  wept  so  sorely,  especially  when  such  things 
were  read  before  him,  that  the  tears  were  never 
dry  on  his  cheeks. 

On  Friday  in  that  week  Sir  Egil  came  to  H61ar, 

and  when  he   and  the  bishop   met   the 

April  12    bishop  rose  up  in  his  bed  to  receive  him 

and  embraced  him  with  joy.     Then  they 

spoke  together  of  many  things  known  to  none  else. 

The  bishop  showed  him  how  he  had  appointed 
all  things,  and  Sir  Egil  thought  it  wise  in  every  jot. 
On  Saturday  the  bishop  bade  Deacon  Einar  bring 
into  the  wooden  hall — for  he  was  lying  there — 
some  very  fair  tapestries  and  two  flagons  wrought 
preciously. 

Then  said  the  bishop  to  Sir  Egil :  '  These  tapes- 
tries, Sir  Egil,  we  will  give  thee,  and  likewise  these 
flagons  wherewith  thou  mayest  deck  thy  room 
fairly ;  also  we  will  give  thee  our  gold  ring  which 
we  have  had  wrought  and  have  worn,  and  there 
is  in  it  a  holy  relic  of  a  bone  of  the  sainted  John, 
Bishop  of  H61ar. 

Then  he  took  that  same  ring  from  his  finger 
and  handed  it  to  him;  and  as  soon  as  Sir  Egil 
had  thought  to  keep  the  ring,  then  the  bishop 
snatched  the  ring  from  him,  saying :  '  Thou  shalt 
not  get  the  ring  till  I  am  dead ;  thou  wilt  keep  me 
more  in  mind  afterwards.' 


ch.  65.]  BISHOP  OF  HOLAR.  141 

It  was  done  even  as  he  said.  Then  said  the 
bishop  to  Sir  Egil  that  he  would  send  him  that 
summer  to  Norway  to  the  archbishop,  with  that 
tidings  about  his  death,  which  he  said  he  knew 
would  quickly  come  to  pass.  Then  were  the 
letters  written  which  were  to  go  on  to  the  arch- 
bishop, wherein  Lord  Laurence  declared  that  it 
would  better  serve  the  church,  both  lay  and  learned, 
in  H61ar  see  to  have  an  Icelander  for  a  bishop 
than  a  Norwegian  j  for  he  would  know  the  char- 
acter of  the  people  better.  In  all  ways  the  bishop 
prepared  for  his  departure  like  one  that  was  whole  ; 
but  all  could  see  how  his  strength  faded.     At  .  .  . 

[Here  ends  the  Manuscript ;  and  the  end  of  the 
history  for  the  three  last  days  of  Laurence' 
life  is  lacking,  for  he  died  on  the  1 6th  of 
April  For  his  last  day  Einar's  Annals 
say:] 

On  the  last  day  of  his  life  he  bade  Sir  Egil  and 

Deacon  Einar  read  in  his  hearing   the 

Ap£\*6'  offices  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  and  when  they 

were  read  he  thus  spoke  :  '  Ye  twain  are 

both  my  disciples,  and  therefore  I  entreat  you  to 

keep  these  offices  hereafter  every  day.' 

Then  brother  Ami  read  mass,  and  the  bishop 
made  all  his  due  responses  in  the  Mass,  and  after 
Mass,  when  the  blessing  was  given  upon  those  who 
stood  by,  he  yielded  up  his  soul  to  God,  as  I  should 
truly  trust.  Also  Sir  Thorstein  Illugason  bore 
witness  that  he  had  never  been  by  any  man  who 
had  departed  so  wonderfully  from  the  world  as 
Lord  Bishop  Laurence. 


NOTES. 


1.  Ch.  I.  p.  I.  Admonished  me  to  keep.  That  Einar 
Haflidason,  though  nowhere  so  named,  was  the  author  of 
this  Saga,  Dr.  Vigfusson  proves  clearly  in  his  preface  to 
Biskupa  Sbgur,  vol.  i.     His  principal  reasons  are — 

(i.)  The  frequent  identity  of  language  between  the  Saga 
and  the  Annals  which  are  known  to  be  Einar's. 
If  the  author  of  the  Saga  and  Einar  had  been 
different,  one  of  them  would  have  to  be  considered 
as  borrowing  the  words  of  the  other  about  matters 
he  had  seen  with  his  own  eyes  ;  which  is  most 
unlikely. 

(2.)  The  constant  allusions  in  the  Saga  to  Einar  as  a 
bosom  friend  of  Laurence ;  chaps.  44,  47,  65,  and 
see  Index. 

(3.)  The  allusions  to  Einar's  father,  Haflidi  Steinsson. 
Einar  is  of  course  also  the  one  who  was  night  and 
day  in  his  service,  a  few  lines  lower. 

2.  Ch.  I.  p.  2.  This  account.  Written  more  than  fifteen 
years  after  Laurence's  death  in  1331.  This  is  proved 
(Vigfusson)  by  the  allusion  in  ch.  40  to  'Ami  Vadi  the 
archbishop,'  who  was  not  archbishop  till  1346.  Einar's 
Annals  give  1307  for  his  birth,  and  the  following  prayer: — 
'  I,  a  sinner,  entreat  all  who  read  or  hear  this  history  to 
pray  to  God  that  on  Doomsday  I  may  be  reckoned  among 
his  chosen,  and  may  his  blessed  mother  Mary  succour  me 
in  my  dying  hour  and  beg  mercy  for  me  of  her  blessed  Son. 
Ave  Maria  mater  domini  succurre  mihi  peccatori  hie  et  in 

ftituro  seeu/o,  Amen. ' 


144  NOTES. 

3.  Ch.  II.  p.  2.  Illugi,  othenuise  Hilarius.  Cp.  Jbrfs 
Saga,  ch.  7,  where  the  founding  of  the  Northern  see  is 
described.  '  At  Holar  .  .  .  dwelt  a  worthy  priest  named 
Illugi,  son  of  Biorn.  Of  all  the  worthy  men  in  the  Northern 
Quarter,  he  only  was  ready  to  rise  up  from  his  father's 
heritage  for  the  love  of  God  and  the  needs  of  Holy  Church. 
For  ere  that  there  had  been  long  beatings  of  the  bush 
(]>&for)  betwixt  the  chief  men,  as  to  who  should  quit  his 
father's  heritage  and  homestead,  and  none  was  ready  to  do 
so,  save  he  only.  And  all  can  see  that  this  he  did  for 
God's  sake,  and  he  might  well  hope  for  what  must  now 
have  been  fulfilled,  namely,  that  God  would  give  him  a  fair 
home  in  bliss  everlasting,  which  may  well  be  called  the 
inheritance  of  the  good. ' 

4.  Ch.  III.  p.  4.  Keep  awaterfast ;  drink  no  wine  or  beer. 

5.  Ch.  III.  p.  4.  7'hese  things  befell  abroad.  Einar,  the 
Annalist,  now  and  then  spoils  the  flow  of  his  Saga  by  these 
Annual  Registers.  They  are  bare  and  often  grammarless 
lists  of  crusades,  poisonings,  battles,  marvels ;  in  fact,  all 
the  doings  of  the  great  world,  strangely  mixed  up,  and  seen 
belated  and  awry  through  the  spectacles  of  a  monk  in  a 
remote  island,  which  was  shut  off  half  the  year  from  news. 
The  vital  change  for  Iceland — Norwegian  laws  came — has 
bare  mention. 

6.  Ch.  III.  p.  5.  Contest  over  the  glebes  (stadamdl).  Also 
ch.  5,  p.  10,  claim  to  the  demesnes:  and  ch.  6,  p.  10.  This 
attempt  to  impropriate  for  Holy  Church,  under  the  pretext 
of  Scriptural  injunction,  the  estates  of  the  lay  Icelanders,  is 
recorded  in  the  Second  Life  of  St.  Thorldk,  ch.  12  (Bis.  Sog. 
i.  275).  Thorlak,  at  his  consecration  in  1178,  was  instructed 
by  Archbishop  Eystein  that  '  all  the  church  estates  which 
were  by  old  custom  held  by  laymen  should  now  be  all  under 
the  bishop's  power  according  to  the  directions  which  were 
attested  by  the  orders  of  the  apostles  and  holy  fathers.' 
The  struggle,  begun  by  Thorlak,  to  enforce  this  decree  was 
called  stadamdl,  the  suit  or  litigation  of  the  steads  or  livings  ; 
after  it  had  lasted  more  than  a  century,  it  partly  subsided, 
while  Laurence  was  still  a  priest,  under  an  agreement  made 
in  1296  (see  Icel.  Diet.  s.v.  and  end  of  ch.  11  below, 
'  twelve  yeomen  confirmed  church  property  by  oath  '). 


NOTES.  145 

7.  Ch.  VI.  p.  10,  Sigurd.  This  Modruvellir  compromise 
is  also  named  in  Ami's  Saga,  ch.  53  (Bis.  Sog.  i.  750) ;  and 
the  writer  adds,  'and  this  happened  on  many  other  estates.' 
By  the  time  Laurence  had  become  bishop,  the  stadamdl  had 
partly  ceased,  but  the  struggle  began  again  within  the 
church  between  bishop  and  abbot :  witness  the  wrangling 
over  Modruvellir  itself  which  fills  the  end  of  our  Saga. 

8.  Ch.  VII.  p.  12,  Flitting-days  (fardagar):  'four  succes- 
sive days  in  spring,  at  the  end  of  May  (O.  S.)  in  which 
householders  in  Iceland  changed  their  abode.'     (Diet,  s.v.) 

9.  Ch.  XI.  p.  19,  Long  fast,  Icel.  langa-fasta;  'Lent' 
was  the  foreign  word. 

10.  Ch.  XV.  p.  25,  Got  hold  of  the  ring  of  the  church 
door.  Of  course  for  sanctuary.  Clerks  means  'clergy' 
(klerkar)  throughout. 

10a.  Ch.  XIV.  p.  23,  Fire  came  up  from  Mount  Hekla. 
This  was  in  1300.  It  is  odd  that  Einar  never  mentioned  in 
ch.  7  above  (though  he  names  the  earthquake),  or  in  ch.  10 
below,  the  great  eruption  of  1294,  thus  described  in  his 
Annals  for  that  year  : — '  The  fifth  fire  on  Mount  Hekla 
came  so  furiously  and  with  such  an  earthquake,  that  far 
and  wide  in  Fljots  Hlid  and  in  Rangarvellir  and  beyond 
the  River  Thjor  the  earth  split,  and  many  houses  fell 
because  of  the  earthquake,  so  that  men  perished.  Men 
could  go  dry  shod  over  the  Rang  River  because  of  the 
pumice.  Far  and  wide  in  Lon  [Inlet]  and  wherever  the 
stream  slackened  the  pumice  was  so  thick  as  to  hide  the 
river.  ...  At  Husatopt  the  hot  spring  vanished  which 
had  been  there  from  all  ages.  So  deep  a  gulf  and  cleft 
came  that  no  man  could  see  its  bottom.  .  .  .  For  three 
days  in  Flagbjorn  Holt  the  becks  were  like  milk  to  look 
upon. ' 

n.  Ch.  XV.  p.  26,  a  moot;  Norse  thing,  the  general 
word  for  a  formal  assembly. 

12.  Ch.  XVII.  p.  28,  novellae,  Icel.  nyjungar,  innova- 
tions in  law. 

13.  Ch.  XIX.  p.  34.  Compare  the  episode  of  Snjolf  in 
ch.  50.  The  good  chronicler,  like  everybody  else  of  his 
time,  is  ever  on  the  watch  for  a  judgment. 

K 


146  NOTES. 

14.  Ch.  XIX.  p.  35,  St.  Thorldk.  The  life  of  this  fiery 
bishop  is  translated  by  Mr.  York  Powell,  and  included  in 
Vigfusson  and  Powell's  Origines  Islandiae.  It  is  a  very 
remarkable  Saga.  The  Annals  of  Einar  say  that  Thorlak 
was  enshrined  in  1292. 

15.  Ch.  XIX.  p.  35,  Audite.  The  song  of  Moses  in 
Deuteronomy  xxxii. 

16.  Ch.  XXIV.  p.  47,  official,  Lat.  officialis — a  vicarius 
or  deputy-in-charge. 

17.  Ch.  XXX.  p.  58,  A  man  whom  he  trusted.  This 
and  similar  phrases  point  to  Einar,  the  biographer,  who 
names  himself  for  the  first  time  on  p.  60  below,  as  a  pupil 
of  Laurence. 

18.  Ch.  XXXII.  p.  63,  Gudmundar  Saga,  ch.  8,  Bis. 
Sbg.  i.  420-I. 

19.  Ch.  XXXV,  p.  71  and  ch.  48,  p.  100,  ells,  of 
wadmal  or  stuff — the  Icelandic  measure  of  value  in  most 
cases.  This  arrangement  of  Audun's  would  have  lowered 
the  minimum  of  taxable  incomes  (120  ells  here  =120  ells 
a  year),  and  struck  at  the  poor ;  hence  the  fury  of  the 
4  vagabonds'  or  '  land-loupers '  (lausamemi). 

20.  Ch.  XXXVI.  p.  74,  Pledging  of  Mary  {Marlu- 
minni).  '  These  memorial  toasts  were  in  the  heathen  age 
consecrated  to  the  gods  Thor,  Odin,  Bragi,  Frey,  Njord, 
who  on  the  introduction  of  Christianity  were  replaced  by 
Christ,  the  Saints,  the  Archangel  Michael,  the  Virgin 
Mary,  and  St.  Olaf.  The  toasts  to  the  Queen,  Army,  etc., 
in  English  banquets  are  probably  a  relic  of  this  ancient 
Teutonic  ceremony.'     (Diet.  s.v.  Minni.) 

21.  Ch.  XLIV.  p.  92,  low-chant-,  namely  when  the 
Host  was  elevated.  The  whole  picture  of  Laurence's  life 
and  ministrations  is  very  natural  and  touching ;  the  early- 
dews  were  still  on  Christianity  in  Iceland.  People  had, 
indeed,  that  childlike  interest  in  church  clothes  and 
upholstery  which  is  not  yet  extinct ;  but  then  they  wrestled 
in  prayer,  like  Vikings  in  battle  with  man  or  the  elemencs. 

22.  Ch.  L.  p.  103,  quit  of  the  iron  prong.  Does  Snjolf 
mean  his  pride  that  had  shackled  him  ? 

23.  Ch.  LIII.  p.  109,  singing-maids.  Also  a  kind  of 
bell. 


NOTES.  147 


24.  Ch.  LVI.  p.  118.  Einar  says  in  the  Annals  for  1327, 
1  they  made  such  a  set  at  Laurence  that  they  nearly  sus- 
pended him  from  his  bishopric' 

25.  Ch.  LXV.  p.  135,  Where  the  star  had  reached.  'In 
olden  and  modern  days  in  Iceland  the  time  in  the  winter 
evenings  was  marked  by  the  position  of  the  Pleiades  above 
the  horizon  .  .  .  that  constellation  is  therefore  called  ' '  the 
star  "  par  excellence.''    (Diet.  s.v.  St  jama.) 


INDEX 


Notb. — The  accent  lengthens  the  vowel,  but  does  not  stress  the 
syllable.     The  numbers  refer  to  the  pages  of  this  book. 


Aki,  Hakon's  orator,  26. 

Alf  Krdk  to  Iceland  with  writs,  28. 

Arngrim     Brandson,   to    Norway 

from  Bishop  John,  121 ;  at  the 

organ, 122. 
Arni,  Bishop  of  Skalholt,  goes  out, 

5  ;  back,  10  ;  receives  Laurence, 

12-13,  32  >  his  humility,  36. 
Arni,  'Gadding,' his  presumption, 

Arni,  son  of  Laurence,  born,  28 ; 
monk,  68  ;  crosses  Laurence,  89 ; 
priest,  97  ;  riotous,  ill,  repentant, 
and  relapses,  134. 

Audun  the  'Red,'  canon  at  Ni- 
dards and  Archbishop  Jorund's 
enemy,  21 ;  Laurence's  enemy, 
48 ;  bishop  of  Hdlar,  61 ;  slights 
Laurence,  62  ;  energy,  liberality, 
and  power,  65  ;  visits,  69  ;  recon- 
ciled to  Laurence,  71 ;  to  Nor- 
way, 73  ;  ill,  74 ;  recommends 
Laurence  as  his  successor,  75  ; 
dies,  76. 


Baegis  Water,  37. 

Ban  of  the  Church,  11,  100. 

Berg  the  '  Wren,'  his  folly,  29-30. 

Berg  Jdnsson,  steward  of  Eilif,  132. 

Berg  Sokkason,  friend  of  Laurence, 
68 ;  made  by  him  reformer  of 
Munka-Thvera,  8  ;  abbot,  97. 


Bjdrn,  brother,  goes  to  Iceland 
with  Laurence  as  visitor,  31,  32  ; 
his  presumption,  33 ;  quarrels 
with  Laurence,  40 ;  back  to  Nor- 
way, 41. 

Bjdrn  Qfeigsson,  96,  123. 

Bjdrn  Onundarson,  steward,  103. 

Breidabdlstad,  in  Vestrhdp,  3,  67. 

Canons  at  Nidards,  quarrel  with 
Archbishop  Jdrund,  21 ;  de- 
nounced by  Laurence,  23 ;  get 
him  sent  to  Iceland,  30  ;  take  all 
rule,  42 ;  seize,  imprison,  slander 
Laurence,  42-48  :  send  him  back 
to  Hdlar,  52 ;  elect  him  bishop 
there,  76. 

Christ  Church  at  Nidards,  76 ; 
burnt,  132. 

Dreams,  of  Thorgrima,  % ;  of 
Laurence,  53,  56,  136. 

Earthquakes,  14,  42. 

Egil  Eyjolfsson,  taught  by  Laur- 
ence, 60 ;  priest,  69 ;  mediates  be- 
tween Laurence  and  Audun,  71  ; 
brings  decree  electing  Laurence, 
78 ;  gets  Grenjadarstad,  90 ; 
advises  Laurence,  119;  sent  to 
Throndhjem  about  Mddruvellir, 
120-2;  wins  case,  127;  at  last 
illness  of  Laurence,  136-end. 


i5o 


INDEX. 


Eilif,  Sir,  Canon  at  Nidards,  21 ; 
Official,  47 ;  Archbishop,  54 ; 
elects  Laurence,  76 ;  friendly 
with  him,  85. 

Eilif,  a  priest  of  small  Latin,  35. 

Einar  Haflidason,  the  biographer, 
schooled  by  Laurence,  60 ;  emi- 
nent, 66  ;  best  loved  of  Laurence, 
02  ;  reads  to  Laurence,  95  ;  has 
his  signet,  98  ;  'his  close  friend,' 
135  ;  sees  him  die,  140-1. 

Eirek,  King  of  Norway,  5,  9; 
eats  and  drinks  to  Laurence, 
14-5 ;  dies,  22. 

Eyja  Firth,  36,  37. 

Finnbj5kn,  a  yeoman,  82. 

Gaseyri,  40,  43-4,  119. 

Gizur  ■  Gall,'  105. 

Goldsmith  Eyjdlf,  132,  136. 

Grenjadar-stad  or  benefice,  62,  72, 
90. 

Gudmund,  Abbot  of  Thingeyri, 
welcomes  Laurence,  60 ;  dis- 
agrees with  Audun,  67  ;  to  Nor- 
way, 73  ;  back,  77  ;  agrees  with 
Laurence  about  Thingeyri,  99. 

Gudmund  Hallson,  levies  men, 
8-9. 

Gudmund,  Bishop  of  Hdlar,  his 
remains,  honoured  by  Audun, 
63-4- 

Gudrun,  the  Lady,  entertains 
Gudmund,  78. 

Gudrun,  daughter  of  Illugi,  100. 

Gulskitni,  45. 

Haflidi  Steinsson,  '  dearest 
friend '  of  Laurence,  3  ;  steward 
at  Hdlar,  10 ;  counsels  Laurence 
not  to  resist  Bishop  Jorund,  41 ; 
at  Breidabdlstad,  60,  67  ;  father 
of  Einar2  60;  prebendary  at 
Thingeyri,  67  ;  dies,  70. 

Hakon,  King  of  Norway,  1,  22,  26, 
7°- 

Hakon  Ulfsson,  opens  letters, 
127-8. 


Hallbera,  abbess  at  Stad,  17;  dies, 

133- 
Hekla,  eruption,  23,  and  note  xoa. 
Hildibrand,  priest  at  Baegis  Water, 

37-40. 
Hdlar,  passim. 
Hvamm  living,  82. 

Illugi  or  Ilarius,  2,  and  see  note  3. 

John  the  Fleming,  teaches  Canon 
Law  to  Laurence,  17  ;  his  Norse, 
20. 

John  of  Hdlar,  bishop  and  saint, 
his  memory  honoured  by  Audun, 
64-5 ;  his  bowl,  86. 

John  Hallddrsson,  bishop  of  Skal- 
holt,  elected,  77 ;  arrives,  87 ; 
his  dealings,  coldness,  and  par- 
tial reconciliation  with  Laurence , 
103,  108-110,  115,  123,  129. 

John  Kodransson,  105. 

Jorund,  archbishop  at  Nidards,  9; 
his  character ;  visited  by  Laur- 
ence, 16 ;  gives  him  a  church, 
18 ;  quarrels  with  the  Chapter, 
21 ;  makes  a  writ  against  them, 
23  ;  rebukes  Laurence,  31 ;  falls 
sick,  and  loses  power,  42  ;  pities 
Laurence,  51 ;  dies,  52. 

Jorund,  Thorsteinsson,  Bishop  of 
Hdlar,  1 ;  to  Norway,  5  ;  teaches 
Laurence,  7 ;  abroad  again,  8  ; 
back,  9;  gives  Laurence  a  living, 
9 ;  takes  part  in  Glebe-contest, 
10 ;  in  affair  of  Modruvellir,  10- 
12  ;  deals  with  Berg  '  Wren,'  29  ; 
his  penetration,  30 ;  cool  _  to 
Laurence,  36-39 ;  opposes  him, 


41 ;  bitterly  and  openly,  43  *, 
speaks  more  softly,  44  ;  slanders 
Laurence  to  the  archbishop,  45- 


49 ;    receives    him    better,    53 ; 
dies,  57. 

Kalf,  father  of  Laurence,  2,  3,  6. 
Ketil  Thorkelsson,  70,  79,  113. 
Klaeng  '  the  Caster,'  20. 
Klaeng  Hjaltason,  priest,  130. 


INDEX. 


t5' 


Kodran  Hranason,  Sir,  58  ;  Audun 
takes  Grenjadarstad  from  him, 
62  ;  quarrels  further  with  Audun, 
66 ;  dies,  70. 

Latin,  use  of,  8,  15,  17,  20,  26, 
3*>  65. 

Laurence  K&lfsson,  parentage  and 
birth,  1-4  ;  boyhood,  5-8  ;  priest 
at  twenty-two,  9  ;  first  rebuffs 
from  Bishop  Jorund,  10-12 ;  to 
Norway  to  K.  Eirek,  14-16 ;  at 
Throndhjem,  feuds  with  Chap- 
ter, 17-32;  '  visitor '  with  Bjorn 
to  Hdlar  See,  and  feuds  with 
Bishop  Jorund,  33-44 ;  back  to 
Throndhjem  and  imprisoned, 
45-52 ;  to  Iceland  and  in  low 
fortune,  52-68 ;  Benedictine 
monk,  68  ;  elected  bishop,  76  ; 
his  administration,  80-83  '■>  con- 
secration,  87  ;  way  of  daily  life, 
90-97  ;  settles  Thingeyri  monas- 
tery, 99 ;  punishes  lawless 
unions,  100-102  ;  litigation  with 
M5druyellir,  106-128 ;  admon- 
ishes Ami,  134 ;  sickness  and 
death,  135-141. 

Letters-patent,  32,  38. 

Magnus,  King,  1,  15. 

Malfrid,  The  Lady,  77-8. 

Miracles,  6,  9,  80. 

Modruvellir,  Sigurd  evicted  from, 
10;  cloister  of  canons  founded 
by  Jorund  in  1295,  19 ;  chanting 
instituted,  28  ;  brethren  spend, 
66  ;  burnt,  67  ;  pays  Hdlar  rent, 
81 ;  complains  against  Laurence 
in  consequence — his  answer,  87- 
88  ;  arbitrators  appointed,  106  ; 
debate,  107-9  \  Laurence  repairs 
it,  109 ;  he  summoned  on  new 
plaint,  113;  new  debate  and 
apparent  concession  by  Laur- 
ence, 114-119;  who  sends  Egil 
to  Norway  to  appeal,  120-122  ; 
and  so  gains  the  case,  126  ;  and 
reforms  monastery,  130. 


Munka-Thvera,  Thdrir,  abbot  of, 
36  ;  disputes,  37-40  ;  Laurence 
visits,  57 ;  Berg  Sokkason 
abbot,  81. 

Music  on  organ,  122 ;  on  harp,  3  ; 
in  Iceland,  123. 

Nidaros,  see  under  Archbishop 

Jorund  and  Eilif. 
Norwegian  laws  into  Iceland,  5. 

Oblaud,  Hallvardson,  7. 

6laf's  Church  in  Nidaros,  18-21, 

25  ;  Olaf's  offering,  21. 
Olaf  Hjaltason,  91,  97. 

Paul  Thorsteinsson,  hi. 
Peter,  Lord,  12-14, 

Sighvat  the  Landsman,  21,  23. 
48. 

Sigurd  of  Hlid,  10,  11. 

Skalholt,  5,  12,  52,  and  very  often. 

Skuli  Ingason,  steward  at  Hdlar, 
80  ;  improvident,  133,  136-7. 

Snjdlf,  Sir,  enemy  of  Laurence, 
39,  61 ;  excommunicated  but 
indifferent,  72 ;  quarrels  with 
Bishop  Laurence,  84 ;  humble, 
tipsy,  punished  miraculously, 
repentant,  103-104, 

Solveig,  37. 

'  Stadamal '  or  Glebe  dispute,  see 
note  6. 

Thingeyri  monastery,  arbitrated 
on  by  Laurence,  83 ;  debated 
before  Archbishop  Eilif,  88-9 ; 
tithes  dispute  settled  by  Laur- 
ence, 99,  ico. 

Thdrarin  '  Keg,'  2-4. 

Thdrd,  Lord,  30;  shelters  Laur- 
ence^ 36,  39. 

Thorgeir,  123. 

Thorgrima,  Laurence's  mother, 
2-4. 

Thorlak,  bishop  and  saint,  33. 

Thorlak,  abbot,  113. 


152 


INDEX. 


Thorstein  Kolbeinsson,  ioo. 

Thorstein  Illugason,  'shardstone,' 
Official  at  Hdlar,  58,  59,  79 ;  at 
Breidabdlstad— visits  last  illness 
of  Laurence,  137-end. 

Thorstein  Thorleifsson,  quest- 
man, 96. 

Thorvald  Geirsson,  37. 

Thrand,  'Cracker,'  15. 

Throndhjem,  see  under  Archbishop 
Jorund  and  Eilif. 

Thurid,  mistress  of  Laurence  and 
mother   of  Ami,   23 ;    succours 


Laurence  in  prison,  50;  the  Lady 
Thurid  (?),  82. 

Uppsala-Hr6lf  intrudes  at  Mod- 
ruvellir,  122-124;  banned,  130. 

ValthjoV,  Sir,  choirmaster  at 
Hdlar,  91 ;  assaults  Deacon 
Thdrd  in  church,  112. 

Vellir,  2,  97. 

Warcrack,  16. 
Waterfast,  4  :  see  note  4. 


Printed  by  T.  and  A.  Constable,  Printers  to  Her  Majesty, 
at  the  Edinburgh.  University  Press. 


BINDING  SECT.       OCT  1  8 1962 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


PT 

Einarr 

Haflidason 

7272 

The 

life  of  Laurence 

IAE5